Atv61 programming manual_en_v2

Programming manual
Retain for future use
Altivar 61
Variable speed drives
for asynchronous motors

3
Contents
Before you begin______________________________________________________________________________________________ 4
Documentation structure________________________________________________________________________________________ 5
Steps for setting up the drive ____________________________________________________________________________________ 6
Factory configuration __________________________________________________________________________________________ 7
Setup – Preliminary recommendations_____________________________________________________________________________ 8
Graphic display terminal _______________________________________________________________________________________ 10
Description of the terminal _______________________________________________________________________________ 10
Description of the graphic screen __________________________________________________________________________ 11
First power-up – [5. LANGUAGE] menu_____________________________________________________________________ 14
Subsequent power ups__________________________________________________________________________________ 15
Programming: Example of accessing a parameter_____________________________________________________________ 16
Quick navigation _______________________________________________________________________________________ 17
Integrated display terminal _____________________________________________________________________________________ 20
Functions of the display and the keys_______________________________________________________________________ 20
Accessing menus ______________________________________________________________________________________ 21
Accessing menu parameters _____________________________________________________________________________ 22
[2. ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC-) ____________________________________________________________________________________ 23
Structure of parameter tables ___________________________________________________________________________________ 26
Interdependence of parameter values ____________________________________________________________________________ 27
Finding a parameter in this document ____________________________________________________________________________ 28
[1.1 SIMPLY START] (SIM-)____________________________________________________________________________________ 29
[1.2 MONITORING] (SUP-) ____________________________________________________________________________________ 35
[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) ________________________________________________________________________________________ 44
[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) _________________________________________________________________________________ 59
[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-) ____________________________________________________________________________ 75
[1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-)________________________________________________________________________________________ 99
[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) ____________________________________________________________________________ 112
[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) _____________________________________________________________________________ 170
[1.9 COMMUNICATION] (COM-) _______________________________________________________________________________ 192
[1.10 DIAGNOSTICS]________________________________________________________________________________________ 196
[1.11 IDENTIFICATION] ______________________________________________________________________________________ 198
[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-) ____________________________________________________________________________ 199
[1.13 USER MENU] (USr-) ____________________________________________________________________________________ 202
[1.14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD] (PLC-) _________________________________________________________________________ 203
[3. OPEN / SAVE AS] ________________________________________________________________________________________ 204
[4. PASSWORD] (COd-)______________________________________________________________________________________ 206
[6 MONITORING CONFIG.] ___________________________________________________________________________________ 208
[7 DISPLAY CONFIG.] _______________________________________________________________________________________ 212
[MULTIPOINT SCREEN] _____________________________________________________________________________________ 216
Maintenance _______________________________________________________________________________________________ 217
Faults – Causes – Remedies __________________________________________________________________________________ 218
User settings tables _________________________________________________________________________________________ 223
Index of functions ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 225
Index of parameter codes_____________________________________________________________________________________ 226

4
Before you begin
Read and understand these instructions before performing any procedure with this drive.
DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE
• Read and understand the Installation Manual in full before installing or operating the ATV61 drive. Installation,
adjustment, repair, and maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel.
• The user is responsible for compliance with all international and national electrical standards in force concerning
protective grounding of all equipment.
• Many parts in this variable speed drive, including printed wiring boards, operate at line voltage. DO NOT TOUCH.
Use only electrically insulated tools.
• DO NOT touch unshielded components or terminal strip screw connections with voltage present.
• DO NOT short across terminals PA and PC or across the DC bus capacitors.
• Install and close all the covers before applying power or starting and stopping the drive.
• Before servicing the variable speed drive
- Disconnect all power.
- Place a “DO NOT TURN ON” label on the variable speed drive disconnect.
- Lock the disconnect in the open position.
• Disconnect all power including external control power that may be present before servicing the drive. WAIT
15 MINUTES for the DC bus capacitors to discharge. Then follow the DC bus voltage measurement procedure
given in the Installation Manual to verify that the DC voltage is less than 45 Vdc. The drive LEDs are not accurate
indicators of the absence of DC bus voltage.
Electric shock will result in death or serious injury
CAUTION
DAMAGED EQUIPMENT
Do not operate or install any drive that appears damaged.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

5
Documentation structure
The following Altivar 61 technical documents are available on the Telemecanique website (www.telemecanique.com) as well as on the
CD-ROM supplied with the drive.
Installation Manual
This describes how to assemble and connect the drive.
Programming Manual
This describes the functions, parameters and use of the drive terminal (integrated display terminal and graphic display terminal).
The communication functions are not described in this manual, but in the manual for the bus or network used.
Communication Parameters Manual
This manual describes:
• The drive parameters with specific information for use via a bus or communication network.
• The operating modes specific to communication (state chart).
• The interaction between communication and local control.
Manuals for Modbus, CANopen, Ethernet, Profibus, INTERBUS, Uni-Telway, FIPIO
and Modbus Plus, etc.
These manuals describe the assembly, connection to the bus or network, signaling, diagnostics, and configuration of the communication-
specific parameters via the integrated display terminal or the graphic display terminal.
They also describe the communication services of the protocols.
ATV 38/ATV 61 Migration Manual
This manual describes the differences between the Altivar 61 and the Altivar 38 and explains how to replace an Altivar 38, including how
to replace drives communicating on a bus or a network.

6
Steps for setting up the drive
INSTALLATION
v 1 Consult the Installation Manual
PROGRAMMING
b 2 Power up without run command
b 3 Select the language, if the drive
has a graphic display terminal
b 4 Configure the
[SIMPLY START] (SIM-) menu
v 2-wire or 3-wire control
v Macro configuration
v Motor parameters
Perform an auto-tuning operation
v Motor thermal current
v Acceleration and deceleration
ramps
v Speed variation range
Tips:
• Before you start programming, complete
the user setting tables, page 223.
• Perform an auto-tuning operation to
optimize performance, page 33.
• If you get lost, return to the factory
settings, page 201.
Note: Check that the wiring
of the drive is compatible with
its configuration.
b 5 Start

7
Factory configuration
Drive factory settings
The Altivar 61 is factory-set for the most common operating conditions:
• Macro-configuration: Pumps/fans
• Motor frequency: 50 Hz
• Energy-saving variable torque applications
• Normal stop mode on deceleration ramp
• Stop mode in the event of a fault: freewheel
• Linear, acceleration and deceleration ramps: 3 seconds
• Low speed: 0 Hz
• High speed: 50 Hz
• Motor thermal current = rated drive current
• Standstill injection braking current = 0.7 x rated drive current, for 0.5 seconds
• No automatic starts after a fault
• Switching frequency 2.5 kHz or 12 kHz depending on drive rating
• Logic inputs:
- LI1: forward (1 operating direction), 2-wire control on transition
- LI2: inactive (not assigned)
- LI3: switching of 2nd speed reference
- LI4: fault reset
- LI5, LI6: inactive (not assigned)
• Analog inputs:
- AI1: 1st speed reference 0 +10 V
- AI2: 2nd speed reference 0-20 mA
• Relay R1: The contact opens in the event of a fault (or drive off)
• Relay R2: The contact closes when the drive is in operation
• Analog output AO1: 0-20 mA, motor frequency
If the above values are compatible with the application, the drive can be used without changing the settings.
Option card factory settings
The option card inputs/outputs are not factory-set.

8
Setup – Preliminary recommendations
Turning on and configuring the drive
Power switching via line contactor
User adjustment and extension of functions
• The display unit and buttons can be used to modify the settings and to extend the functions described in the following pages.
• Return to factory settings is made easy by the [1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-) menu, see page 199.
• There are three types of parameter:
- Display: Values displayed by the drive
- Adjustment: Can be changed during operation or when stopped
- Configuration: Can only be modified when stopped and no braking is taking place. Can be displayed during operation
DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Before turning on and configuring the Altivar 61, check that the PWR (POWER REMOVAL) input is deactivated
(at state 0) in order to prevent unintended operation.
• Before turning on or on exiting the configuration menus, check that the inputs assigned to the run command are
deactivated (at state 0) since they can cause the motor to start immediately.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
INCOMPATIBLE LINE VOLTAGE
Before turning on and configuring the drive, ensure that the line voltage is compatible with the supply voltage range shown
on the drive nameplate. The drive may be damaged if the line voltage is not compatible.
CAUTION
• Avoid operating the contactor frequently (premature ageing of the filter capacitors).
• Cycle times < 60 s may result in damage to the pre-charge resistor.
DANGER
• Check that changes made to the settings during operation do not present any danger.
• We recommend stopping the drive before making any changes.

9
Setup – Preliminary recommendations
Starting
Important:
• In factory settings mode, the motor can only be supplied with power once the “forward”, “reverse” and “DC injection stop” commands
have been reset:
- On power-up or a manual fault reset or after a stop command
If they have not been reset, the drive will display “nSt” but will not start.
• If the automatic restart function has been configured ([Automatic restart] (Atr) parameter in the [1.8-FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)
menu, see page 173), these commands are taken into account without a reset being necessary.
Test on a low power motor or without a motor
• In factory settings mode, [Output Phase Loss] detection (OPL) page 176 is active (OPL = YES). To check the drive in a test or
maintenance environment without having to switch to a motor with the same rating as the drive (particularly useful in the case of
high power drives), deactivate [Output Phase Loss] (OPL = no).
• Set [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [V/F 2pts] (UF2) or [V/F 5pts] (UF5) or [U/F Quad.] (UFq) ([1.4-MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu,
see page 63)
Using motors in parallel
• Set [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [V/F 2pts] (UF2) or [V/F 5pts] (UF5) or [U/F Quad.] (UFq) ([1.4-MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu,
see page 63)
CAUTION
• Motor thermal protection will not be provided by the drive if the motor current is less than 0.2 times the rated drive
current. Provide an alternative means of thermal protection.
CAUTION
• Motor thermal protection is no longer provided by the drive. Provide an alternative means of thermal protection on
every motor.

10
Graphic display terminal
Although the graphic display terminal is optional for low-power drives, it is a standard component on high-power drives (see catalog).
The graphic display terminal can be disconnected and connected remotely (on the door of an enclosure for example) using the cables and
accessories available as options (see catalog).
Description of the terminal
Note: Buttons 3, 4, 5 and 6 can be used to control the drive directly, if control via the terminal is activated.
1 Graphic display
2 Function keys
F1, F2, F3, F4,
see page 11.
3 STOP/RESET
button
4 RUN button
5 Navigation button:
• Press (ENT): - To save the current value
- To enter the selected menu or parameter
• Turn CW/
CCW:
- To increment or decrement a value
- To go to the next or previous line
- To increase or decrease the reference if control
via the terminal is activated
7 ESC key: Aborts a value,
a parameter or a menu to
return to the previous selection
6 Button for reversing the direction
of rotation of the motor

11
Description of the graphic screen
1. Display line. Its content can be configured; the factory settings show:
• The drive state (see page 12)
• The active control channel:
- Term: Terminals
- HMI: Graphic display terminal
- MDB: Integrated Modbus
- CAN: Integrated CANopen
- NET: Communication card
- APP: Controller Inside card
• Frequency reference
• LOC/REM: “LOC” appears if the command and reference are set via the graphic display terminal; otherwise, “REM” appears.
This corresponds to the state selected by the [T/K] function key.
2. Menu line. Indicates the name of the current menu or submenu.
3. Menus, submenus, parameters, values, bar charts, etc., are displayed in drop-down window format on a maximum of 5 lines.
The line or value selected by the navigation button is displayed in reverse video.
4. Section displaying the functions assigned to the keys F1 to F4 and aligned with them, for example:
The function keys are dynamic and contextual.
Other functions (application functions) can be assigned to these keys via the [1.6 COMMAND] menu.
5. Indicates that there are no more levels below this display window.
Indicates that there are more levels below this display window.
6. Indicates that there are no more levels above this display window.
Indicates that there are more levels above this display window.
: Displays the code of the selected parameter, i.e., the code corresponding to the 7-segment display.
: Contextual help.
: Navigate horizontally to the left, or go to previous menu/submenu or, for a value, go to the next digit up, displayed
in reverse video (see the example on page 13).
: Navigate horizontally to the right or go to next menu/submenu (going to the [2 ACCESS LEVEL] menu in this
example) or, for a value, go to the next digit down, displayed in reverse video (see the example on page 13).
: Command and reference via the terminal, see page 111.
F1 F2 F3 F4
RDY Term +0.00 Hz REM
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
Code << >> T/K
1
2
3
4
6
5
• Code F1
• HELP F1
• << F2
• >> F3
• T/K F4

12
Drive state codes:
- ACC: Acceleration
- CLI: Current limit
- CTL: Controlled stop on input phase loss
- DCB: DC injection braking in progress
- DEC: Deceleration
- FLU: Motor fluxing in progress
- FRF: Drive at fallback speed
- FST: Fast stop
- NLP: No line power (no line supply on L1, L2, L3)
- NST: Freewheel stop
- OBR: Auto-adapted deceleration
- PRA: Power Removal function active (drive locked)
- RDY: Drive ready
- RUN: Drive running
- SOC: Controlled output cut in progress
- TUN: Auto-tuning in progress
- USA: Undervoltage alarm

13
Example configuration windows:
Example configuration window for one value:
The << and >> arrows (keys F2 and F3) are used to select the digit to be modified, and the navigation button is rotated to increase or
decrease this number.
When only one possible selection can be made, the selection made is indicated by
Example: Only one language can be chosen.
When multiple selection is possible, the selections made are indicated by
Example: A number of parameters can be chosen to form the [USER MENU].
5 LANGUAGE
English
Français
Deutsch
Español
Italiano
<< >> T/K
Chinese
PARAMETER SELECTION
1.3 SETTINGS
Ramp increment
Acceleration
Deceleration
Acceleration 2
Deceleration 2
Edit
Acceleration
9.51 s
Min = 0.01 Max = 99.99
<< >> T/K
>>
Acceleration
9.51 s
Min = 0.01 Max = 99.99
<< >> T/K

14
First power-up – [5. LANGUAGE] menu
The first time the drive is powered up, the user will automatically be guided through the menus as far as [1. DRIVE MENU].
The parameters in the [1.1 SIMPLY START] submenu must be configured and auto-tuning performed before the motor is started up.
Display for 3 seconds following power-up
3 seconds
Switches to [5 LANGUAGE] menu automatically.
Select the language and press ENT.
Switches to [2 ACCESS LEVEL] menu
(see page 23)
Select the access level and press ENT.
Switches to [1 DRIVE MENU]
(see page 19)
ESC
Press ESC to return to [MAIN MENU]
ATV61HU22N4
2.2kW/3HP 380/480V
Config. n°1
5 LANGUAGE
English
Français
Deutsch
Español
Italiano
Chinese
2 ACCESS LEVEL
Basic
Standard
Advanced
Expert
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2. MONITORING
1.3. SETTINGS
1.4. MOTOR CONTROL
1.5. INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
Code << >> T/K
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K

15
Subsequent power ups
Switches to [1. DRIVE MENU].
If no operator inputs are made, switches to “Display”
automatically 10 seconds later (the display will vary
depending on the selected configuration).
Users can return to [MAIN MENU] by pressing
ENT or ESC.
3 seconds
10 seconds
ENT or ESC
ATV61HU22N4
2.2kW/3HP 380/480V
Config. n°1
RDY Term +38 Hz REM
1. DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
RDY Term +38 Hz REM
Frequency ref.
Min=0 Max=60
T/K
RDY Term +38 Hz REM
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
38 Hz

16
Programming: Example of accessing a parameter
Accessing the acceleration ramp
Note:
• To select a parameter:
- Turn the navigation button to scroll vertically.
• To modify a parameter:
- Use the << and >> keys (F2 and F3) to scroll horizontally and select the digit to be modified (the selected digit changes to white
on a black background).
- Turn the navigation button to modify the digit.
• To cancel the modification:
- Press ESC.
• To save the modification:
- Press the navigation button (ENT).
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
ENT
ESC
1.3 SETTINGS
Ramp increment: 01
Acceleration 9.51 s
Deceleration: 9.67 s
Acceleration 2: 12.58 s
Deceleration 2: 13.45 s
Code << >> T/K
ENT
ENT or
ESC
Acceleration
9.51 s
Min = 0.01 Max = 99.99
<< >> T/K

17
Quick navigation
In order to access this function you must first reassign the F4 key, which is assigned by default to control via the terminal (T/K) (see page 111).
If the “Quick” function is displayed above the F4 key, you can gain quick access to a parameter from any screen.
Example:
Press F4 to access the Quick screen, which contains
4 selection options.
• [HOME]: Return to [MAIN MENU].
• [DIRECT ACCESS TO...]: Opens the direct access window, which
will contain the text “1”. The function keys << and >> (F2 and F3)
can be used to select each of the numbers and the navigation
button to increment or decrement the numbers: 1.3 in the example
below.
• [10 LAST MODIFICATIONS]: Opens a window in which the last
10 parameters modified can be accessed directly.
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Standard mot. freq: 5 0 Hz IEC
Rated motor power: 0.37 kW (0.5 HP)
Rated motor volt.: 206 V
Rated mot. current: 1.0 A
Rated motor freq.: 50.0 Hz
Code << >> Quick
ENT
QUICK NAVIGATION
RETURN TO MAIN MENU
DIRECT ACCESS TO...
10 LAST MODIFICATIONS
GOTO MULTIPOINT SCREEN
Code
See page 216
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code Quick
DIRECT ACCESS TO...
1.3
<< >>
ENT
1.3 SETTINGS
Ramp increment: 01
Acceleration 9.51 s
Code << >> Quick
10 LAST MODIFICATIONS
Acceleration: 10 s
Speed prop. gain: 25%
Rated mot. current: 15 A
Preset speed 4: 20 Hz
Preset speed 5: 30 Hz
Code
ESC
ENT
Rated mot. current
15.0 A
<< >>

18
[MAIN MENU] – Menu mapping
Content of [MAIN MENU] menus
[1 DRIVE MENU] See next page
[2 ACCESS LEVEL] Defines which menus can be accessed (level of complexity)
[3 OPEN / SAVE AS] Can be used to save and recover drive configuration files
[4 PASSWORD] Provides password protection for the configuration
[5 LANGUAGE] Language selection
[6 MONITORING CONFIG.] Customization of information displayed on the graphic display terminal during operation
[7 DISPLAY CONFIG.] • Customization of parameters
• Creation of a customized user menu
• Customization of the visibility and protection mechanisms for menus and parameters
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
6 MONITORING CONFIG.
7 DISPLAY CONFIG.
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
1.6 COMMAND
1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.
1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT
1.9 COMMUNICATION
1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
1.11 IDENTIFICATION
1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS
1.13 USER MENU
1.14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD

19
[1 DRIVE MENU]
Content of [1. DRIVE MENU] menus:
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
1.6 COMMAND
1.9 COMMUNICATION
1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
1.11 IDENTIFICATION
1.13 USER MENU
[1.1 SIMPLY START]: Simplified menu for fast startup
[1.2 MONITORING]: Visualization of current, motor and input/output values
[1.3 SETTINGS]: Accesses the adjustment parameters, which can be modified during operation
[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]: Motor parameters (motor nameplate, auto-tuning, switching frequency, control algorithms, etc.)
[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]: I/O configuration (scaling, filtering, 2-wire control, 3-wire control, etc.)
[1.6 COMMAND]: Configuration of command and reference channels (graphic display terminal, terminals, bus, etc.)
[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]: Configuration of application functions (e.g., preset speeds, PID, etc.)
[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]: Configuration of fault management
[1.9 COMMUNICATION]: Communication parameters (fieldbus)
[1.10 DIAGNOSTICS]: Motor/drive diagnostics
[1.11 IDENTIFICATION]: Identification of the drive and internal options
[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]: Access to configuration files and return to factory settings
[1.13 USER MENU]: Specific menu set up by the user in the [6. DISPLAY CONFIG.] menu
[1.14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD]: Configuration of optional Controller Inside card

20
Integrated display terminal
Low-power Altivar 61 drives (see catalog) feature an integrated display terminal with a 7-segment 4-digit display. The graphic display
terminal described on the previous pages can also be connected to these drives as an option.
Functions of the display and the keys
• Pressing or does not store the selection.
• Press and hold down (>2 s) or to scroll through the data quickly.
Save and store the selection: ENT
The display flashes when a value is stored.
Normal display, with no fault present and no startup:
- 43.0: Display of the parameter selected in the SUP menu (default selection: motor frequency)
- CLI: Current limit
- CtL: Controlled stop on input phase loss
- dCb: DC injection braking in progress
- FLU: Motor fluxing in progress
- FRF: Drive at fallback speed
- FSt: Fast stop
- nLP: No line power (no line supply on L1, L2, L3)
- nSt: Freewheel stop
- Obr: Auto-adapted deceleration
- PrA: Power Removal function active (drive locked)
- rdY: Drive ready
- SOC: Controlled output cut in progress
- tUn: Auto-tuning in progress
- USA: Undervoltage alarm
The display flashes to indicate the presence of a fault.
• Four 7-segment
displays
• Enters a menu or
a parameter, or saves
the displayed parameter
or value
• Returns to the previous
menu or parameter,
or increases the
displayed value
• Exits a menu or parameter,
or aborts the displayed
value to return to the
previous value in the
memory
• Goes to the next
menu or parameter,
or decreases the
displayed value
• 2 CANopen status LEDs
• 2 Modbus status LEDs
Note:

21
Accessing menus
A dash appears after menu and submenu codes to differentiate them from parameter codes.
Examples: FUn- menu, ACC parameter.
The grayed-out menus may not be accessible depending on the control access (LAC) configuration.
XXX
CtL-
FUn-
SIM-
I-O-
SEt-
SUP-
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
FCS-
LAC-
CON-
FLt-
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
SPL-
ESC
ENT
ESC
drC-
COd-
USr-
ESC
ENT
ESC
Displays the drive state
SETTINGS
APPLICATION FUNCT.
INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
FAULT MANAGEMENT
SIMPLY START
Menus
MONITORING
MOTOR CONTROL
COMMAND
Power-up
FACTORY SETTINGS
PASSWORD
ACCESS LEVEL
COMMUNICATION
(page 44) Adjustment parameters, can be modified during
operation
(page 112) Configuration of application functions (e.g., preset
speeds, PID, etc.)
(page 75) I/O configuration (scaling, filtering, 2-wire control,
3-wire control, etc.)
(page 170) Configuration of fault management
(page 29) Simplified menu for fast startup
(page 35) Visualization of current, motor and input/output values
(page 62) Motor parameters (motor nameplate, auto-tuning,
switching frequency, control algorithms, etc.)
(page 99) Configuration of command and reference channels
(graphic display terminal, terminals, bus, etc.)
(page 199) Access to configuration files and return to factory
settings
(page 206)
(page 23)
(page 192) Communication parameters (fieldbus)
(page 202) Specific menu, set up by the user using the graphic
display terminal.
USER MENU
PROGRAMMABLE CARD
(page 203) Menu for the Controller Inside card, if present.

22
Accessing menu parameters
Save and store the displayed selection:
The display flashes when a value is stored.
All the menus are “drop-down scrolling” menus, which means that after the
last parameter, if you continue to press , you will return to the first parameter
and, conversely, you can switch from the first parameter to the last parameter
by pressing .
Selection of multiple assignments for one parameter
Example: List of group 1 alarms in [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
menu (I-O-)
A number of alarms can be selected by “checking” them as
follows.
The digit on the right indicates: selected
not selected
The same principle is used for all multiple selections.
ENT
ACC 15.0
ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
26.0 26.0
ESC
dEC ENT
SEt-
Menu Value or assignment
1 flash (save)
Parameter
(Next parameter)
ENT
ESC
1st
nth
last
Menu
ENT
ESC
I-O-
Alarm not selected
Alarm selected

23
[2. ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC-)
With graphic display terminal
Basic
Access to 5 menus only, and access to 6 submenus only in the
[1. DRIVE MENU] menu.
A single function can be assigned to each input.
Standard
This is the factory-set level. Access to 6 menus only, and access to all
submenus in the [1. DRIVE MENU] menu.
A single function can be assigned to each input.
Advanced
Access to all menus and submenus.
Several functions can be assigned to
each input.
Expert
Access to all menus and submenus as for [Advanced] level, and access to
additional parameters.
Several functions can be assigned to each input.
2 ACCESS LEVEL
Basic
Standard
Advanced
Expert
<< >> T/K
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code << >> T/K
1. DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2. MONITORING
1.3. SETTINGS
1.11. IDENTIFICATION
1.12. FACTORY SETTINGS
Code << >> T/K
1.13 USER MENU
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
1.6 COMMAND
1.9 COMMUNICATION
1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
1.11 IDENTIFICATION
1.13 USER MENU
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
7 DISPLAY CONFIG.
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
7 DISPLAY CONFIG.

24
With integrated display terminal:
Code Name/Description Factory setting
LAC- Std
bAS
Std
Adu
Epr
• bAS: Limited access to SIM, SUP, SEt, FCS, USr, COd and LAC menus. A single function can be assigned to
each input.
• Std: Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal. A single function can be assigned to each input.
• AdU: Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal. Several functions can be assigned to each input.
• EPr: Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal and access to additional parameters. Several functions
can be assigned to each input.
XXX
SIM-
ESC
ESC
ENT
LAC-
ESC
ENT
ESC
COd-
ACCESS LEVEL
Power-up

25
Comparison of the menus that can be accessed on the graphic display terminal/
integrated display terminal
(1)Can be accessed if the Controller Inside card is present.
Graphic display terminal Integrated display terminal Access level
[2 ACCESS LEVEL] LAC- (Access level)
BasicbAS
StandardStd(factorysetting)
AdvancedAdU
ExpertEPr
[3. OPEN / SAVE AS] -
[4 PASSWORD] COd- (Password)
[5 LANGUAGE] -
[1 DRIVE MENU] [1.1 SIMPLY START] SIM- (Simply start)
[1.2 MONITORING] SUP- (Monitoring)
[1.3 SETTINGS] SEt- (Settings)
[1.11 IDENTIFICATION] -
[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] FCS- (Factory settings)
[1.13 USER MENU] USr- (User menu)
A single function can be assigned to each input. A single function can be assigned
to each input.
[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] drC- (Motor control)
[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] I-O- (I/O configuration)
[1.6 COMMAND] CtL- (Command)
[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] FUn- (Application functions)
[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] FLt- (Fault management)
[1.9 COMMUNICATION] COM- (Communication)
[1.10 DIAGNOSTICS] -
[1.14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD] (1) PLC- (Controller Inside card) (1)
[6 MONITORING CONFIG.] -
A single function can be assigned to each input. A single function can be assigned to
each input.
[7 DISPLAY CONFIG.] -
Several functions can be assigned to each input. Several functions can be assigned
to each input.
Expert parameters Expert parameters
Several functions can be assigned to each input. Several functions can be assigned
to each input.

26
Structure of parameter tables
The parameter tables in the descriptions of the various menus can be used with both the graphic display terminal and the integrated display
terminal. They, therefore, contain information for these two terminals in accordance with the description below.
Example:
[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)
Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting
UPd- b [+/- SPEED]
Function can be accessed for reference channel [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) = [+/- speed] (UPdt), see page 109
USP M [+ speed assignment] [No] (nO)
no
LII
v [No] (nO): Function inactive
v [LI1] (LI1)
Note:
• The text in square brackets [ ] indicates what you will see on the graphic display terminal.
• The factory settings correspond to [Macro configuration] (CFG) = [Pumps.Fans] (PnF). This is the macro configuration
set at the factory.
5
2
3
1
4
6
8
7
1. Name of menu on 4-digit 7-segment display
2. Submenu code on 4-digit 7-segment display
3. Parameter code on 4-digit 7-segment display
4. Parameter value on 4-digit 7-segment display
5. Name of menu on graphic display terminal
6. Name of submenu on graphic display terminal
7. Name of parameter on graphic display terminal
8. Value of parameter on graphic display terminal

27
Interdependence of parameter values
The configuration of certain parameters modifies the adjustment range of other parameters, in order to reduce the risk of errors. This may
result in the modification of a factory setting or a value you have already selected.
Example 1:
1. [Switching freq.] (SFr) page 71 set to 16 kHz.
2. [Sinus filter] (OFI), see page 71, set to [Yes] (YES) (and confirmed with “ENT”) limits [Switching freq.] (SFr) to 8 kHz.
If you set [Sinus filter] (OFI) to [No] (nO), [Switching freq.] (SFr) will no longer be limited but will remain at 8 kHz. If you require 16 kHz,
you must reset [Switching freq.] (SFr).
Example 2:
1. The factory setting of [Switching freq.] (SFr) page 71 remains unchanged at 2.5 kHz.
2. Setting [Sinus filter] (OFI) page 71 to [Yes] (YES) (and confirming with “ENT”) changes the factory setting of [Switching freq.]
(SFr) to 4 kHz.
3. If you set [Sinus filter] (OFI) to [No] (nO), [Switching freq.] (SFr) will remain at 4 kHz. If you require 2.5 kHz, you must reset
[Switching freq.] (SFr).

28
Finding a parameter in this document
The following assistance with finding explanations on a parameter is provided:
• With the integrated display terminal: Direct use of the parameter code index, page 226, to find the page giving details of the
displayed parameter.
• With the graphic display terminal: Select the required parameter and press : [Code]. The parameter code is displayed instead
of its name while the key is held down.
Example: ACC
Then use the parameter code index, page 226, to find the page giving details of the displayed parameter.
F1
1.3 SETTINGS
Ramp increment: 01
Acceleration 9.51 s
Code << >> T/K
Code
1.3 SETTINGS
Ramp increment: 01
ACC 9.51 s
Code << >> T/K

29
[1.1 SIMPLY START] (SIM-)
With graphic display terminal:
The [1.1-SIMPLY START] (SIM-) menu can be used for fast startup, which is sufficient for the majority of applications.
The parameters in this menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present, with the following exceptions:
• Auto-tuning, which causes the motor to start up
• The adjustment parameters on page 34
The [1.1 SIMPLY START] (SIM-) menu should be configured on its own or before the other drive configuration menus. If a modification
has previously been made to any of them, in particular in [1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-), some [1.1 SIMPLY START] (SIM-) parameters
may be changed, for example, the motor parameters, if a synchronous motor has been selected. Returning to the [1.1 SIMPLY START]
(SIM-) menu after modifying another drive configuration menu is unnecessary but does not pose any risk. Changes following modification
of another configuration menu are not described, to avoid unnecessary complication in this section.
Macro configuration
Macro configuration provides a means of speeding up the configuration of functions for a specific field of application.
5 macro configurations are available:
• Start/stop
• General use
• PID regulator
• Communication bus
• Pumps/fans (factory configuration)
Selecting a macro configuration assigns the parameters in this macro configuration.
Each macro configuration can still be modified in the other menus.
Note: The parameters of the [1.1 SIMPLY START] (SIM-) menu must be entered in the order in which they appear, as the later
ones are dependent on the first ones.
For example [2/3 wire control] (tCC) must be configured before any other parameters.
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
ENT
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
ENT
RUN Term +0.00 Hz REM
1.1 SIMPLY START
2/3 wire control
Macro configuration
Customized macro
Standard mot. freq
Input phase loss
Code << >> T/K
XXX
SIM-
SUP-
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ENT
ESC
LAC-
SIMPLY START
Power-up

30
Macro configuration parameters
Assignment of the inputs/outputs
(1) To start with integrated Modbus [Modbus Address] (Add) must first be configured, page 194.
Motor control type
• [Gen. Use] (GEn) macro configuration: [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [SVC V] (UUC).
• Other macro configurations: [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [Energy Sav.] (nLd).
Note: These assignments are reinitialized every time the macro configuration changes.
Return to factory settings:
Returning to factory settings with [Config. source] (FCSI) = [Macro-Conf] (InI) page 201 will restore the selected macro configuration.
The [Macro configuration] (CFG) parameter does not change, although [Customized macro] (CCFG) disappears.
Input/
output
[Start/Stop] [Gen. Use] [PID regul.] [Network C.] [Pumps.Fans]
AI1 [Ref.1 channel] [Ref.1 channel] [Ref.1 channel] (PID
reference)
[Ref.2 channel]
([Ref.1 channel] =
integrated Modbus) (1)
[Ref.1 channel]
AI2 [No] [Summing ref. 2] [PID feedback] [No] [Ref.1B channel]
AO1 [Motor freq.] [Motor freq.] [Motor freq.] [Motor freq.] [Motor freq.]
R1 [No drive flt] [No drive flt] [No drive flt] [No drive flt] [No drive flt]
R2 [No] [No] [No] [No] [Drv running]
LI1 (2-wire) [Forward] [Forward] [Forward] [Forward] [Forward]
LI2 (2-wire) [Fault reset] [Reverse] [Fault reset] [Fault reset] [No]
LI3 (2-wire) [No] [Jog] [PID integral reset] [Ref. 2 switching] [Ref 1B switching]
LI4 (2-wire) [No] [Fault reset] [2 preset PID ref.] [Forced local] [Fault reset]
LI5 (2-wire) [No] [Torque limitation] [4 preset PID ref.] [No] [No]
LI6 (2-wire) [No] [No] [No] [No] [No]
LI1 (3-wire) Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop
LI2 (3-wire) [Forward] [Forward] [Forward] [Forward] [Forward]
LI3 (3-wire) [Fault reset] [Reverse] [Fault reset] [Fault reset] [No]
LI4 (3-wire) [No] [Jog] [PID integral reset] [Ref. 2 switching] [Ref 1B switching]
LI5 (3-wire) [No] [Fault reset] [2 preset PID ref.] [Forced local] [Fault reset]
LI6 (3-wire) [No] [Torque limitation] [4 preset PID ref.] [No] [No]
Option cards
LI7 to LI14 [No] [No] [No] [No] [No]
LO1 to LO4 [No] [No] [No] [No] [No]
R3/R4 [No] [No] [No] [No] [No]
AI3, AI4 [No] [No] [No] [No] [No]
RP [No] [No] [No] [No] [No]
AO2 [I motor] [I motor] [I motor] [I motor] [I motor]
AO3 [No] [No] [PID Output] [No] [No]
Graphic display terminal keys
F1 key [No] [No] [No] [No] [No]
F2, F3 keys [No] [No] [No] [No] [No]
F4 key [T/K]
(Control via graphic
display terminal)
[T/K]
display terminal)
[T/K]
display terminal)
[T/K]
display terminal)
[T/K]
display terminal)
In 3-wire control, the assignment of inputs LI1 to LI7 shifts.
Note:
• The factory settings in the parameter tables correspond to [Macro configuration] (CFG) = [Pumps.Fans] (PnF). This is the
macro configuration set at the factory.

31
tCC M [2/3 wire control] [2 wire] (2C)
2C
3C
v [2 wire] (2C)
v [3 wire] (3C)
2-wire control: This is the input state (0 or 1) or edge (0 to 1 or 1 to 0), which controls running or stopping.
Example of “source” wiring:
LI1: forward
LIx: reverse
3-wire control (pulse control): A “forward” or “reverse” pulse is sufficient to command starting, a “stop” pulse is
sufficient to command stopping.
LI1: stop
LI2: forward
LIx: reverse
CFG M [Macro configuration] [Pumps.Fans] (PnF)
StS
GEn
PId
nEt
PnF
v [Start/Stop] (StS): Start/stop
v [Gen. Use] (GEn): General use
v [PID regul.] (PId): PID regulation
v [Network C.] (nEt): Communication bus
v [Pumps.Fans] (PnF): Pumps/fans
CCFG M [Customized macro]
YES
Read-only parameter, only visible if at least one macro configuration parameter has been modified.
v [Yes] (YES)
+24 LI1 LIx
ATV 71
+24 LI1 LI2 LIx
ATV 71
WARNING
To change the assignment of [2/3 wire control] (tCC) press the “ENT” key for 2 s.
The following function will be returned to factory settings: [2 wire type] (tCt) page 76 as will all
functions which assign logic inputs.
The macro configuration selected will also be reset if it has been customized (loss of custom settings).
Check that this change is compatible with the wiring diagram used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
To change the assignment of [Macro configuration] (CFG) press the “ENT” key for 2 s.
Check that the selected macro configuration is compatible with the wiring diagram used.

32
(1)In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.
bFr M [Standard mot. freq] [50Hz IEC] (50)
50
60
v [50Hz IEC] (50): IEC.
v [60Hz NEMA] (60): NEMA.
This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters: [Rated motor power] (nPr), [Rated motor volt.]
(UnS), [Rated drive current] (nCr), [Rated motor freq.] (FrS), [Rated motor speed] (nSP), and [Max frequency]
(tFr) below, [Mot. therm. current] (ItH) page 34, [High speed] (HSP) page 34.
IPL M [Input phase loss] According to drive
rating
nO
YES
v [Ignore] (nO): Fault ignored, to be used when the drive is supplied via a single-phase supply or by the DC bus.
v [Freewheel] (YES): Fault, with freewheel stop.
If one phase disappears, the drive switches to fault mode [Input phase loss] (IPL) but if 2 or 3 phases
disappear, the drive continues to operate until it trips on an undervoltage fault.
This parameter is only accessible in this menu on ATV61H037M3 to HU75M3 drives (used with a single
phase supply).
nPr M [Rated motor power] According to drive
rating
According to drive
rating
Rated motor power given on the nameplate, in kW if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) = [50 Hz IEC] (50), in HP if
[Standard mot. freq] (bFr) = [60 Hz NEMA] (60).
UnS M [Rated motor volt.] According to drive
rating
According to drive
rating and [Standard
mot. freq] (bFr)
Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate.
ATV61pppM3: 100 to 240 V
ATV61pppN4: 200 to 480 V
nCr M [Rated mot. current] 0.25 to 1.1 or 1.2 Hz
according to rating (1)
According to drive
mot. freq] (bFr)
Rated motor current given on the nameplate.
FrS M [Rated motor freq.] 10 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
50 Hz
Rated motor frequency given on the nameplate.
The factory setting is 50 Hz, or preset to 60 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to 60 Hz.
nSP M [Rated motor speed] 0 to 60,000 rpm According to drive
rating
Rated motor speed given on the nameplate.
0 to 9,999 rpm then 10.00 to 60.00 krpm on the integrated display terminal.
If, rather than the rated speed, the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %,
calculate the rated speed as follows:
• Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x
or
• Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (50 Hz motors)
or
tFr M [Max frequency] 10 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
60 Hz
The maximum value is limited by the following conditions:
• It must not exceed 10 times the value of [Rated motor freq.] (FrS)
• Values between 500 Hz and 1,000 Hz are only possible in V/F control and for powers limited to 37 kW
(50 HP) for ATV61Hppp and 45 kW (60 HP) for ATV61Wppp. In this case, configure [Motor control type] (Ctt)
before [Max frequency] (tFr).
100 - slip as a %
100
50 - slip in Hz
50
60 - slip in Hz
60

33
tUn M [Auto tuning] [No] (nO)
nO
YES
dOnE
v [No] (nO): Auto-tuning not performed.
v [Yes] (YES): Auto-tuning is performed as soon as possible, then the parameter automatically changes
to [Done] (dOnE).
v [Done] (dOnE): Use of the values given the last time auto-tuning was performed.
Caution:
• It is essential that all motor parameters ([Rated motor volt.] (UnS), [Rated motor freq.] (FrS), [Rated mot.
current] (nCr), [Rated motor speed] (nSP), [Rated motor power] (nPr)) are configured correctly before
starting auto-tuning.
If one or more of these parameters is modified after auto-tuning has been performed, [Auto tuning] (tUn)
will return to [No] (nO) and the procedure must be repeated.
• Auto-tuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated. If a “freewheel stop” or “fast stop”
function has been assigned to a logic input, this input must be set to 1 (active at 0).
• Auto-tuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands, which will be taken into account after the
auto-tuning sequence.
• If auto-tuning fails, the drive displays [No] (nO) and, depending on the configuration of [Autotune fault mgt]
(tnL) page 186, may switch to [Auto-tuning] (tnF) fault mode.
• Auto-tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds. Do not interrupt the process. Wait for the display to change to
“[Done] (dOnE)” or “[No] (nO)”.
Note: During auto-tuning the motor operates at rated current.
tUS M [Auto tuning status] [Not done] (tAb)
tAb
PEnd
PrOG
FAIL
dOnE
(for information only, cannot be modified)
v [Not done] (tAb): The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor.
v [Pending] (PEnd): Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet performed.
v [In Progress] (PrOG): Auto-tuning in progress.
v [Failed] (FAIL): Auto-tuning has failed.
v [Done] (dOnE): The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor.
PHr M [Output Ph rotation] [ABC] (AbC)
AbC
ACb
v [ABC] (AbC): Forward
v [ACB] (ACb): Reverse
This parameter can be used to reverse the direction of rotation of the motor without reversing the wiring.

34
Parameters that can be changed during operation or when stopped
ItH M [Mot. therm. current] 0 to 1.1 or 1.2 In (1)
according to rating
According to drive
rating
Motor thermal protection current, to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate.
ACC M [Acceleration] 0.1 to 999.9 s 3.0 s
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) (page 32). Make sure that this value is compatible
with the inertia being driven.
dEC M [Deceleration] 0.1 to 999.9 s 3.0 s
Time to decelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) (page 32) to 0. Make sure that this value is compatible
LSP M [Low speed] 0
Motor frequency at minimum reference, can be set between 0 and [High speed] (HSP).
HSP M [High speed] 50 Hz
Motor frequency at maximum reference, can be set between [Low speed] (LSP) and [Max frequency] (tFr).
The factory setting changes to 60 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) = [60Hz NEMA] (60).

35
[1.2 MONITORING] (SUP-)
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
ENT
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
ENT
1.2 MONITORING
I/O MAP
PROG. CARD I/O MAP
COMMUNICATION
MAP
Alarm groups :
HMI Frequency ref. :
Code << >> T/K
XXX
SIM-
SEt-
SUP-
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ENT
ESC
LAC-
MONITORING
Power-up

36
This menu can be used to display the inputs/outputs, the drive internal states and values, and the communication data and values.
I/O
1.2 MONITORING
I/O MAP
PROG. CARD I/O MAP
COMMUNICATION MAP
Alarm groups:
HMI Frequency ref.:
Code << >> T/K
Move from one screen to another
(from LOGIC INPUT MAP
to FREQ. SIGNAL IMAGE)
by turning the navigation button
I/O MAP
LOGIC INPUT MAP
ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE
LOGIC OUTPUT MAP
ANALOG OUTPUTS IMAGE
FREQ. SIGNAL IMAGE
Code T/K
State 0
State 1
RUN Term-{}- +50.00 Hz REM
Access to the selected input
or output configuration:
Press ENT.
LOGIC INPUT MAP LI1 assignment
PR LI1 LI2 LI3 LI4 LI5 LI6 LI7 Forward
Pre Fluxing
LI8 LI9 LI10 LI11 LI12 LI13 LI14 LI1 On Delay : 0 ms
<< >> T/K << >> T/K
RUN Term +50.00 Hz REM RUN Term +50.00 Hz REM
ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE AI1 assignment
AI1 : 9.87 V Ref.1 channel
AI2 : 2.35 mA Forced local
Torque reference
AI1 min value : 0.0 V
AI1 max value : 10.0 V
Code << >> T/K T/K
State 0
State 1
LOGIC OUTPUT MAP LO1 assignment
R1 R2 LO No
LO1 delay time : 0 ms
LO1 active at : 1
LOA: 0000000000000010b LO1 holding time : 0 ms
<< >> T/K << >> T/K
ANALOG OUTPUTS IMAGE AO1 assignment
AO1 : 9.87 V Motor freq.
AO1 min output : 4 mA
AO1 max output : 20 mA
AO1 Filter : 10 ms
Code << >> T/K T/K
FREQ. SIGNAL IMAGE RP assignment
RP input : 25.45 kHz Frequency ref.
Encoder : 225 kHz RP min value : 2 kHz
RP max value : 50 kHz
RP filter : 0 ms
Code << >> T/K T/K
I/O
I/O of the Controller Inside card if it is present
Communication data and values
Drive internal drive states and values (see page 41)
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
1
0
1
0

37
Controller Inside card I/O
Move from one screen to another
(from PROG CARD LI MAP
to PROG. CARD AO MAP)
by turning the navigation button
PROG. CARD I/O MAP
PROG CARD LI MAP
PROG. CARD AI MAP
PROG CARD LO MAP
PROG. CARD AO MAP
Code T/K
State 0
State 1
PROG CARD LI MAP
LI51 LI52 LI53 LI54 LI55 LI56 LI57 LI58
LI59 LI60
<< >> T/K
PROG CARD AI MAP AI51
AI51 : 0.000 mA
AI52 : 9.87 V
0.000 mA
Min = 0.001 Max = 20.000
Code << >> T/K << >> T/K
State 0
State 1
PROG CARD LO MAP
LO51 LO52 LO53 LO54 LO55 LO56
<< >> T/K
PROG. CARD AO MAP AO51
AO51 : 0.000 mA
AO52 : 9.87 V
0.000 mA
Min = 0.001 Max = 20.000
Code << >> T/K << >> T/K
ENT
ENT
1
0
1
0
1
0

38
Communication
[COM. SCANNER INPUT MAP] and [COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP]:
Visualization of registers exchanged periodically (8 input and 8 output) for integrated Modbus and for fieldbus cards.
[COMMUNICATION MAP] indicates the types of bus used for control or reference,
the corresponding command and reference values, the status word, the words selected
in the [DISPLAY CONFIG] menu, etc.
The display format (hexadecimal or decimal) can be configured in the [DISPLAY
CONFIG.] menu.
COMMUNICATION MAP
Command Channel: Modbus
Cmd value: ABCD Hex
Active ref. channel: CANopen
Frequency ref.: - 12.5 Hz
ETA status word: 2153 Hex
Code T/K
W3141: F230 Hex
W2050: F230 Hex
W4325: F230 Hex
W0894: F230 Hex
COM. SCANNER INPUT MAP
COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP
CMD. WORD IMAGE
FREQ. REF. WORD MAP
MODBUS NETWORK DIAG
MODBUS HMI DIAG
CANopen MAP
PROG. CARD SCANNER
Com Scan In1 val.: 0
Code T/K
COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP
Com Scan Out1 val.: 0
Code T/K
CMD. WORD IMAGE
Modbus cmd.: 0000 Hex.
CANopen cmd.: 0000 Hex.
COM. card cmd.: 0000 Hex.
Prog. card cmd: 0000 Hex.
Code T/K
FREQ. REF. WORD MAP
Modbus ref.: 0.0 Hz
CANopen ref.: 0.0 Hz
Ref. Com. card: 0.0 Hz
Prog. Card ref: 0.0 Hz
Code T/K

39
Communication (continued)
The state of the LEDs, the periodic data, the address, the speed, and the
format, etc,. is given for each bus.
LED off
LED on
COMMUNICATION MAP
Cmd value: ABCD Hex
Code T/K
W3141 : F230 Hex
W2050 : F230 Hex
W4325 : F230 Hex
W0894 : F230 Hex
COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP
CMD. WORD IMAGE
FREQ. REF. WORD MAP
MODBUS NETWORK DIAG
MODBUS HMI DIAG
CANopen MAP
PROG. CARD SCANNER
Communication via Modbus
MODBUS NETWORK DIAG
COM LED :
Mb NET frames nb.
Mb NET CRC errors
Code T/K
Communication via the graphic display terminal
MODBUS HMI DIAG
COM LED :
Mb HMI frames nb.
Mb HMI CRC errors
Code T/K
PDO configuration using
the network tool.
Some PDOs cannot be
used.
PDO1 IMAGE
Received PDO1-1 : FDBA Hex
Received PDO1-2
Received PDO1-3
Received PDO1-4
Transmit PDO1-1 : FDBA Hex
Code T/K
Transmit PDO1-2
Transmit PDO1-3
Transmit PDO1-4
PDO2 IMAGE
Received PDO2-2
Received PDO2-3
Received PDO2-4
Code T/K
Transmit PDO2-2
Transmit PDO2-3
Transmit PDO2-4
PDO3 IMAGE
Received PDO3-2
Received PDO3-3
Received PDO3-4
Code T/K
Transmit PDO3-2
Transmit PDO3-3
Transmit PDO3-4
Communication via CANopen
PDO images are only visible if
CANopen has been enabled
(address other than OFF) and if
the PDOs are active.
CANopen MAP
RUN LED :
ERR LED :
PDO1 IMAGE
PDO2 IMAGE
PDO3 IMAGE
Code T/K
Canopen NMT state
Number of TX PDO 0
Number of RX PDO 0
Error codes 0
RX Error Counter 0
TX Error Counter 0

40
Communication (continued)
[Input scanner] and [Output scanner]:
Visualization of registers exchanged periodically (8 input and 8 output).
COMMUNICATION MAP
Cmd value: ABCD Hex
Code T/K
W3141 : F230 Hex
W2050 : F230 Hex
W4325 : F230 Hex
W0894 : F230 Hex
COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP
CMD. WORD IMAGE
FREQ. REF. WORD MAP
MODBUS NETWORK DIAG
MODBUS HMI DIAG
CANopen MAP
PROG. CARD SCANNER
Controller Inside card
PROG. CARD SCANNER
Input scanner
Output scanner
Code T/K
Input scanner
Prg.card. scan in 1: 0
Code T/K
Output scanner
Prog.card.scan Out1: 0
Code T/K

41
Drive-internal states and values
Name/Description
[Alarm groups] (ALGr)
[HMI Frequency ref.] (LFr)
[Internal PID ref.] (rPI)
[Multiplying coeff.] (MFr)
[Frequency ref.] (FrH)
[Output frequency] (rFr)
[Motor current] (LCr)
[Motor speed] (SPd)
[Motor voltage] (UOP)
[Motor power] (OPr)
[Motor torque] (Otr)
[Mains voltage] (ULn)
[Motor thermal state] (tHr)
[Drv. thermal state] (tHd)
[DBR thermal state] (tHb)
[Input Power] (IPr)
[Consumption] (IPHr)
[Run time] (rtH)
[Power on time] (PtH)
[Proc. Operat. Time] (PEt)
[IGBT alarm counter] (tAC)
[PID reference] (rPC)
[PID feedback] (rPF)
[PID error] (rPE)
[PID Output] (rPO)
[Date/Time] (CLO)
[- - - - 2] (o02)
[- - - - 3] (o03)
[- - - - 4] (o04)
[- - - - 5] (o05)
[- - - - 6] (o06)
[Config. active] (CnFS)
[Utilised param. set]
(CFPS)
[ALARMS] (ALr-)
[OTHER STATUS] (SSt-)
Current alarm group numbers
in Hz. Frequency reference via the graphic display terminal (can be accessed if the function has been
configured)
as a process value. PID reference via graphic display terminal (can be accessed if the function has been
configured)
as a % (can be accessed if [Multiplier ref. -] (MA2,MA3) page 119 has been assigned)
in Hz
in Hz
in A
in rpm
in V
as a % of the rated power
as a % of the rated torque
in V. Line voltage from the point of view of the DC bus, motor running or stopped
as a %
as a %
as a % (can only be accessed on high rating drives)
in kW (electrical power consumed by the drive)
in Wh, kWh or MWh (accumulated electrical consumption of drive)
in seconds, minutes or hours (length of time the motor has been switched on)
in seconds, minutes or hours (length of time the drive has been switched on)
in hours (length of time the process has been switched on) This parameter can be initialized by the user if
the drive is replaced, in order to maintain a record of previous times.
in seconds (length of time the “IGBT temperature” alarm has been active)
as a process value (can be accessed if the PID function has been configured)
in Hz (can be accessed if the PID function has been configured)
Current date and time generated by the Controller Inside card (can be accessed if the card has been inserted)
Word generated by the Controller Inside card (can be accessed if the card has been inserted)
Active configuration [Config. n°0, 1 or 2]
[Set n°1, 2 or 3] (can be accessed if parameter switching has been enabled, see page 160)
List of current alarms. If an alarm is present, a appears.
List of secondary states:
- [In motor fluxing] (FLX): In motor fluxing
- [PTC1 alarm] (PtC1): Probe alarm 1
- [PTC2 alarm] (PtC2): Probe alarm 2
- [LI6=PTC alarm] (PtC3): LI6 = PTC probe alarms
- [Fast stop in prog.] (FSt): Fast stop in progress
- [Current Th. attained] (CtA): Current threshold reached
- [Freq. Th. attained] (FtA): Frequency threshold reached
- [Freq. Th. 2 attained] (F2A): 2nd
frequency threshold reached
- [Frequency ref. att.] (SrA): Frequency reference reached
- [Motor th. state att.] (tSA): Motor 1 thermal state reached
- [External fault alarm] (EtF): External fault alarm
- [Auto restart] (AUtO): Automatic restart in progress
- [Remote] (FtL) : Line mode control
- [Auto-tuning] (tUn): Performing auto-tuning
- [Undervoltage] (USA): Undervoltage alarm
- [Cnfg.1 act.] (CnF1): Configuration 1 active
- [Cnfg.2 act.] (CnF2): Configuration 2 active
- [HSP attained] (FLA): High speed reached
- [Set 1 active] (CFP1): Parameter set 1 active
- [In braking] (brS): Drive braking
- [DC bus loading] (dbL): DC bus loading

42
With integrated display terminal
This menu can be used to display the drive inputs, states and internal values.
IOM- I/O MAP
LIA-
b Logic input functions
L1A
to
L14A
Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input. If no functions have been assigned, nO is
displayed.
Use the and arrows to scroll through the functions. If a number of functions have been assigned
to the same input, check that they are compatible.
LIS1
b State of logic inputs LI1 to LI8
Can be used to visualize the state of logic inputs LI1 to LI8
(display segment assignment: high = 1, low = 0)
Example above: LI1 and LI6 are at 1; LI2 to LI5, LI7 and LI8 are at 0.
LIS2
b State of logic inputs LI9 to LI14 and Power Removal
Can be used to visualize the state of logic inputs LI19to LI14 and PR (Power Removal)
(display segment assignment: high = 1, low = 0)
Example above: LI9 and LI14 are at 1, LI10 to LI13 are at 0 and PR (Power Removal) is at 1.
AIA-
b Analog input functions
AI1A
AI2A
AI3A
AI4A
Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input. If no functions have been assigned, nO is
displayed. Use the and arrows to scroll through the functions. If a number of functions have been
assigned to the same input, check that they are compatible.
State 1
State 0
LI1 LI2 LI3 LI4 LI5 LI6 LI7 LI8
State 1
State 0
LI9 LI10 LI11 LI12 LI13 LI14 PR

43
With integrated display terminal
Drive-internal states and values
Code Name/Description Unit
ALGr Alarm groups: Current alarm group numbers
rPI Internal PID reference: PID reference via graphic display terminal (can be accessed if the function has
been configured).
as a process
value
MFr Multiplication coefficient (can be accessed if [Multiplier ref. -] (MA2,MA3) page 119 has been assigned) %
FrH Frequency ref. Hz
rFr Output frequency Hz
LCr Motor current A
SPd Motor speed rpm
UOP Motor voltage V
OPr Motor power %
Otr Motor torque %
ULn Line voltage: Line voltage from the point of view of the DC bus, motor running or stopped. V
tHr Motor thermal state %
tHd Drive thermal state %
tHb DBR thermal state: Accessible on high rating drives only. %
IPr Electrical power consumed by the drive W or kW
IPHr Accumulated electrical consumption of drive Wh, kWh or
MWh
rtH Run time: Length of time the motor has been turned on seconds,
minutes or
hoursPtH Power on time: Length of time the drive has been turned on
PEt Length of time the process has been turned on: in hours. This parameter can be initialized by the user
if the drive is replaced, in order to maintain a record of previous times.
hours
tAC IGBT alarm counter: Length of time the “IGBT temperature” alarm has been active seconds
rPC PID reference: Can be accessed if the PID function has been configured as a process
value
rPF PID feedback: Can be accessed if the PID function has been configured
rPE PID error: Can be accessed if the PID function has been configured
rPO PID Output: Can be accessed if the PID function has been configured Hz
CLO- tIME, dAY: Current date and time generated by the Controller Inside card (can be accessed if the card has
been inserted)
o02 - - - - 2: Word generated by the Controller Inside card (can be accessed if the card has been inserted)
CnFS Config. active: CnF0, 1 or 2 (can be accessed if motor or configuration switching has been enabled,
see page 164)
CFPS Utilised param. set: CFP1, 2 or 3 (can be accessed if parameter switching has been enabled, see page 160)

44
[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-)
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
ENT
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
ENT
1.3 SETTINGS
Ramp increment
Acceleration
Deceleration
Acceleration 2
Deceleration 2
Code << >> T/K
XXX
SIM-
SEt-
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ENT
ESC
LAC-
drC-
SETTINGS
Power-up

45
The adjustment parameters can be modified with the drive running or stopped.
(1)Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 9,000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr).
Inr M [Ramp increment] 0.01 - 0.1 - 1 0.1
0.01
0.1
1
v [0.01]: Ramp up to 99.99 seconds
v [1]: Ramp up to 9,000 seconds
This parameter is valid for [Acceleration] (ACC), [Deceleration] (dEC), [Acceleration 2] (AC2) and [Deceleration 2]
(dE2).
ACC M [Acceleration] 0.01 to 9,000 s (1) 3.0 s
dEC M [Deceleration] 0.01 to 9,000 s (1) 3.0 s
AC2 M [Acceleration 2] 0.01 to 9,000 s (1) 5.0 s
g
See page 122
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS). Make sure that this value is compatible with the
inertia being driven.
dE2 M [Deceleration 2] 0.01 to 9,000 s (1) 5.0 s
g
See page 122
Time to decelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) to 0. Make sure that this value is compatible with the
tA1 M [Begin Acc round] 0 to 100% 10%
g See page 121
Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2) ramp time.
tA2 M [End Acc round] 10%
g
See page 121
- Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2) ramp
time.
- Can be set between 0 and (100% – [Begin Acc round] (tA1))
tA3 M [Begin Dec round] 0 to 100% 10%
g See page 121
Rounding of start of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2) ramp time.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
DANGER
• Check that changes made to the settings during operation do not present any danger.
• We recommend stopping the drive before making any changes.

46
(1)In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate.
tA4 M [End Dec round] 10%
g
See page 121
- Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2)
ramp time.
- Can be set between 0 and (100% – [Begin Dec round] (tA3))
LSP M [Low speed] 0 Hz
Motor frequency at minimum reference, can be set between 0 and [High speed] (HSP).
HSP M [High speed] 50 Hz
Motor frequency at maximum reference, can be set between [Low speed] (LSP) and [Max frequency] (tFr).
The factory setting changes to 60 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) = [60 Hz NEMA] (60).
ItH M [Mot. therm. current] 0 to 1.1 or 1.2 In (1)
according to rating
According to
drive rating
Motor thermal protection current, to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate.
SPG M [Speed prop. gain] 0 to 1,000% 40%
Speed loop proportional gain
SIt M [Speed time integral] 1 to 1,000% 100%
Speed loop integral time constant.
SFC M [K speed loop filter] 0 to 100 0
Speed loop filter coefficient.
g

47
Adjusting the [K speed loop filter] (SFC), [Speed prop. gain] (SPG), and [Speed time
integral] (SIt) parameters
• The following parameters can only be accessed in vector control profiles: [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 63 = [SVC V] (UUC),
[Energy Sav.] (nLd) and [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
• The factory settings are suitable for most applications.
General case: Setting with [K speed loop filter] (SFC) = 0
The regulator is an “IP” type with filtering of the speed reference, for applications requiring flexibility and stability (high inertia, for example).
• [Speed prop. gain] (SPG) affects excessive speed.
• [Speed prop. gain] (SIt) affects the passband and response time.
Initial response Reduction in SIT Reduction in SIT
Initial response Increase in SPG Increase in SPG
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
Reference division
Time in ms

48
Special case: Parameter [K speed loop filter] (SFC) not 0
This parameter must be reserved for specific applications that require a short response time (trajectory positioning or servo control).
- When set to 100 as described above the regulator is a “PI” type, without filtering of the speed reference.
- Settings between 0 and 100 will obtain an intermediate function between the settings below and those on the previous page.
Example: Setting with [K speed loop filter] (SFC) = 100
• [Speed prop. gain] (SPG) affects the passband and response time.
• [Speed time integral] (SIt) affects excessive speed.
Initial response Reduction in SIT Reduction in SIT
Initial response Increase in SPG Increase in SPG
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
Reference division
Time in ms

49
UFr M [IR compensation] 25 to 200% 100%
g See page 67
SLP M [Slip compensation] 0 to 150% 100%
g See page 67
dCF M [Ramp divider] 0 to 10 4
g See page 123
IdC M [DC inject. level 1] 0.1 to 1.1 or 1.2 In (1)
according to rating
0.64 In (1)
g See page 124
Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode.
tdI M [DC injection time 1] 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
g
See page 124
Maximum current injection time [DC inject. level 1] (IdC). After this time the injection current becomes
[DC inject. level 2] (IdC2).
IdC2 M [DC inject. level 2] 0.1 In (1) to [DC inject.
level 1] (IdC)
0.5 In (1)
g See page 124
Injection current activated by logic input or selected as stop mode, once period of time [DC injection time 1] (tdI)
has elapsed.
tdC M [DC injection time 2] 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
g See page 124
Maximum injection time [DC inject. level 2] (IdC2) for injection selected as stop mode only.
g
CAUTION
Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
CAUTION

50
SdC1 M [Auto DC inj. level 1] 0 to 1.1 or 1.2 In (1)
according to rating
0.7 In (1)
g Level of standstill DC injection current. This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) page 125
is not [No] (nO). This parameter is forced to 0 if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 63 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
tdCI M [Auto DC inj. time 1] 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
g
Standstill injection time. This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) page 125 is not [No]
(nO) If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 63 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn) this time corresponds to the zero speed
maintenance time.
SdC2 M [Auto DC inj. level 2] 0 to 1.1 or 1.2 In (1)
according to rating
0.5 In (1)
g 2nd
level of standstill DC injection current.
This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) page 125 is not [No] (nO).
This parameter is forced to 0 if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 63 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
tdC2 M [Auto DC inj. time 2] 0 to 30 s 0 s
g 2nd
standstill injection time.
This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) page 125 = [Yes] (YES).
g
CAUTION
CAUTION
AdC SdC2 Operation
YES x
Ct ≠ 0
Ct = 0
Run command
Speed
t
SdC1
SdC2
tdC1 tdC1 + tdC2
I
t
SdC1
I
t
SdC1
SdC2
tdC1
I
t
0
t
1
0

51
SFr M [Switching freq.] According to rating According to rating
Switching frequency setting.
Adjustment range: It can vary between 1 and 16 kHz, but the minimum and maximum values, as well
as the factory setting, can be limited in accordance with the type of drive (ATV61H or W), the rating
and the configuration of the [Sinus filter] (OFI) and [Motor surge limit.] (SUL) parameters, page 71.
Adjustment with drive running:
- If the initial value is less than 2 kHz, it is not possible to increase it above 1.9 kHz while running.
- If the initial value is greater than or equal to 2 kHz, a minimum of 2 kHz must be maintained while running.
Adjustment with the drive stopped: No restrictions.
Note: In the event of excessive temperature rise, the drive will automatically reduce the switching
frequency and reset it once the temperature returns to normal.
.
CLI M [Current Limitation] 0 to 1.1 or 1.2 In (1)
according to rating
1.1 or 1.2 In (1)
according to rating
Used to limit the motor current.
Note: If the setting is less than 0.25 In, the drive may lock in [Output Phase Loss] (OPF) fault mode if
this has been enabled (see page 176). If it is less than the no-load motor current, the limitation no longer
has any effect.
CL2 M [I Limit. 2 value] 0 to 1.1 or 1.2 In (1)
according to rating
1.1 or 1.2 In (1)
according to rating
g
See page 154
Note: If the setting is less than 0.25 In, the drive may lock in [Output Phase Loss] (OPF) fault mode
if this has been enabled (see page 176). If it is less than the no-load motor current, the limitation no
longer has any effect.
g
CAUTION
On ATV61p075N4 to U40N4 drives, if the RFI filters are disconnected (operation on an IT system), the
switching frequency of the drive must not exceed 4 kHz.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage.

52
FLU M [Motor fluxing] [No] (FnO)
FnC
FCt
FnO
v [Not cont.] (FnC): Non-continuous mode
v [Continuous] (FCt): Continuous mode. This option is not possible if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) page 125 is
[Yes] (YES) or if [Type of stop] (Stt) page 123 is [Freewheel] (nSt).
v [No] (FnO): Function inactive.
At and above 55 kW for ATV61pppM3X and at and above 90 kW for ATV61pppN4, if [Motor control type] (Ctt)
page 63 = [SVC V] (UUC) or [Energy Sav.] (nLd), this selection cannot be made and the factory setting is
replaced by [Not cont.] (FnC).
If [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [Sync. mot.] (SYn) the factory setting is replaced by [Not cont.] (FnC).
In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup, magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the
motor.
• In [Continuous] (FCt) mode, the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up.
• In [Not cont.] (FnC) mode, fluxing occurs when the motor starts up.
The flux current is greater than nCr (configured rated motor current) when the flux is established and is then
adjusted to the motor magnetizing current...
If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 63 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn), the [Motor fluxing] (FLU) parameter causes the
alignment of the rotor and not the fluxing.
tLS M [Low speed time out] 0 to 999.9 s 0 s
Maximum operating time at [Low speed] (LSP) (see page 34)
Following operation at LSP for a defined period, a motor stop is requested automatically. The motor restarts if
the reference is greater than LSP and if a run command is still present.
Caution: Value 0 corresponds to an unlimited period.
SLE M [Sleep Offset Thres.] 0 to 500 or 1,000
according to rating
1 Hz
Adjustable restart threshold (offset) following a stop after prolonged operation at [Low speed] (LSP), in Hz.
The motor restarts if the reference rises above (LSP + SLE) and if a run command is still present.
JGF M [Jog frequency] 0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz
g See page 127
Reference in jog operation
JGt M [Jog delay] 0 to 2.0 s 0.5 s
g See page 127
Anti-repeat delay between 2 consecutive jog operations.
g
CAUTION

53
SP2 M [Preset speed 2] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
10 Hz
g See page 130
Preset speed 2
according to rating
15 Hz
g See page 130
Preset speed 3
according to rating
20 Hz
g See page 130
Preset speed 4
according to rating
25 Hz
g See page 130
Preset speed 5
according to rating
30 Hz
g See page 130
Preset speed 6
according to rating
35 Hz
g See page 130
Preset speed 7
according to rating
50 Hz
g
See page 130
Preset speed 8
g

54
(1)If a graphic display terminal is not in use, values greater than 9,999 will be displayed on the 4-digit display with a period mark after the
thousand digit, e.g. 15.65 for 15,650.
SrP M [+/-Speed limitation] 0 to 50% 10%
g See page 134
Limitation of +/- speed variation
rPG M [PID prop. gain] 0.01 to 100 1
g See page 141
Proportional gain
rIG M [PID integral gain] 0.01 to 100 1
g See page 142
Integral gain
rdG M [PID derivative gain] 0.00 to 100 0
g See page 142
Derivative gain
PrP M [PID ramp] 0 to 99.9 s 3.0 s
g
See page 142
PID acceleration/deceleration ramp, defined to go from [Min PID reference] (PIP1) to [Max PID reference]
(PIP2) and vice versa.
POL M [Min PID output] -500 to 500 or -1,000
to 1,000 according
to rating
0 Hz
g See page 142
Minimum value of regulator output in Hz
POH M [Max PID output] 0 to 500 or 1,000
according to rating
60 Hz
g See page 142
Maximum value of regulator output in Hz
PAL M [Min fbk alarm] See page 142 (1) 100
g See page 142
Minimum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback
PAH M [Max fbk alarm] See page 142 (1) 1,000
g See page 142
Maximum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback
g

55
thousand digit, e.g. 15.65 for 15,650.
PEr M [PID error Alarm] 0 to 65,535 (1) 100
g See page 142
Regulator error monitoring threshold.
PSr M [Speed input%] 1 to 100% 100%
g See page 143
Multiplying coefficient for predictive speed input.
rP2 M [Preset ref. PID 2] See page 146 (1) 300
g See page 146
Preset PID reference
g See page 146
g See page 146
LPI M [PID Threshold] 100
g
nO
-
See page 145
PID regulator feedback supervision threshold (alarm can be assigned to a relay or a logic output, page 89).
Adjustment range:
v between [Min PID feedback] (PIF1) and [Max PID feedback] (PIF2) (2).
tPI M [PID Ctrl. time delay] 0 to 600 s 0 s
g See page 145
PID regulator feedback supervision time delay
g

56
tLIM M [Motoring torque lim] 0 to 300% 100%
g See page 153
Torque limitation in motor mode, as a % of the rated torque.
tLIG M [Gen. torque lim] 0 to 300% 100%
g See page 153
Torque limitation in generator mode, as a % of the rated torque.
Ctd M [Current threshold] 0 to 1.1 or 1.2 In (1)
according to rating
In (1)
Upper current threshold for [I attained] (CtA) function assigned to a relay or a logic output (see page 89).
CtdL M [Low I Threshold] 0 to 1.1 or 1.2 In (1)
according to rating
0
Lower current threshold for [Low I Th.At.] (CtAL) function assigned to a relay or a logic output (see page 89).
Ftd M [Freq. threshold] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
[Standard mot. freq]
(bFr)
Frequency threshold for [Freq. Th. attain.] (FtA) function assigned to a relay or a logic output (see page 89).
FtdL M [Low Freq.Threshold] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0
Lower frequency threshold for [Low Frq. Th. Attain.] (FtAL) function assigned to a relay or a logic output
(see page 89).
F2d M [Frequency 2 threshold] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
[Standard mot. freq]
(bFr)
Frequency threshold for [Freq. Th. 2 attain.] (F2A) function assigned to a relay or a logic output (see page 89).
F2dL M [2 Freq. Threshold] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0
Lower frequency threshold for [2Low F.Thld] (F2AL) function assigned to a relay or a logic output (see page 89).
ttd M [Motor therm. level] 0 to 118% 100%
g See page 176
Trip threshold for motor thermal alarm (logic output or relay)
rtd M [High Freq. Ref. Thr.] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0
Upper frequency reference threshold for [High Ref.] (rtAH) function assigned to a relay or a logic output
(see page 89).
rtdL M [Low Freq. Ref. Thr.] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0
Lower frequency reference threshold for [Low Ref.] (rtAL) function assigned to a relay or a logic output
(see page 89).
g

57
JPF M [Skip Freq.] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0 Hz
Skip frequency. This parameter prevents prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated
frequency. This function can be used to prevent a critical speed, which would cause resonance, being reached.
Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive.
JF2 M [Skip Freq. 2] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0 Hz
2nd skip frequency. This parameter prevents prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the
regulated frequency. This function can be used to prevent a critical speed, which would cause resonance,
being reached. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive.
JF3 M [3rd Skip Frequency] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0 Hz
3rd
skip frequency. This parameter prevents prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the
regulated frequency. This function can be used to prevent a critical speed, which would cause resonance,
being reached. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive.
JFH M [Skip.Freq.Hysteresis] 0.1 to 10 Hz 1 Hz
Skip frequency range: between (JPF – JFH) and (JPF + JFH), for example.
This adjustment is common to all 3 frequencies (JPF, JF2 and JF3).
LUn M [Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed] 20 to 100% 60%
g See page 189.
Underload threshold at rated motor frequency ([Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 32), as a % of the rated
motor torque.
LUL M [Unld.Thr.0.Speed] 0 to
[Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed]
(LUn)
0%
g See page 189.
Underload threshold at zero frequency, as a % of the rated motor torque.
rMUd M [Unld. Freq.Thr. Det.] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0 Hz
g See page 189.
Underload detection minimum frequency threshold
Srb M [Hysteresis Freq.Att.] 0.3 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0.3 Hz
g See pages 189 and 190.
Maximum deviation between the frequency reference and the motor frequency, which defines steady
state operation.
FtU M [Underload T.B.Rest.] 0 to 6 min 0 min
g See page 189.
Minimum time permitted between an underload being detected and any automatic restart.
In order for an automatic restart to be possible, the value of [Max. restart time] (tAr) page 173 must exceed
that of this parameter by at least one minute.
g

58
LOC M [Ovld Detection Thr.] 70 to 150% 110%
g See page 190.
Overload detection threshold, as a % of the rated motor current [Rated mot. current] (nCr). This value must be
less than the limit current in order for the function to work.
FtO M [Overload T.B.Rest.] 0 to 6 min 0 min
g See page 190.
Minimum time permitted between an overload being detected and any automatic restart.
In order for an automatic restart to be possible, the value of [Max. restart time] (tAr) page 173 must exceed that
of this parameter by at least one minute.
FFd M [NoFlo.Freq.Thres.Ac.] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0 Hz
g See page 166.
Zero flow detection activation threshold
The parameter can be accessed if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not [No] (nO) and if [No Flow Period Det.]
(nFd) is not 0.
LFd M [No Flow Offset] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0 Hz
g See page 166.
Zero flow detection offset
(nFd) is not 0.
nFFt M [Freq.Th.Sensor. Act.] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0 Hz
g See page 166.
Zero fluid detection activation threshold
The parameter can be accessed if [No Flow Sensor] (nFS) is not [No] (nO).
nFSt M [Flow Times Ctrl] 0 to 999 s 10 s
g See page 166.
Zero fluid detection activation time delay
CHt M [Flow.Lim.Th.Active] 0 to 100% 0%
g See page 168.
Function activation threshold, as a % of the max. signal of the assigned input
The parameter can be accessed if [Flow.Sen.Inf] (CHI) is not [No] (nO).
rCHt M [Flo.Lim.Thres. Inact.] 0 to 100% 0%
g See page 168.
Function deactivation threshold, as a % of the max. signal of the assigned input
dFL M [Dec. Flow. limit] 0.01 to 9,000 s (1) 5.0 s
g See page 168.
Time to decelerate from [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) to 0. Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia
being driven.
g

59
[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
ENT
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
ENT
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Standard mot. freq
Rated motor power
Rated motor volt.
Rated mot. current
Rated motor freq.
Code << >> T/K
XXX
SIM-
I-O-
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ENT
ESC
LAC-
drC-
MOTOR CONTROL
Power-up

60
The parameters in the [1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is
present, with the following exceptions:
• [Auto tuning] (tUn) page 62, which causes the motor to start up.
• Parameters containing the sign in the code column, which can be modified with the drive running or stopped.
bFr M [Standard mot. freq] [50Hz IEC] (50)
50
60
v [50Hz IEC] (50): IEC.
v [60Hz NEMA] (60): NEMA.
This parameter modifies the presets of parameters [Rated motor power] (nPr), [Rated motor volt.] (UnS),
[Rated mot. current] (nCr), [Rated motor freq.] (FrS), [Rated motor speed] (nSP) and [Max frequency] (tFr)
below, [Mot. therm. current] (ItH) page 46, [High speed] (HSP) page 46, [Freq. threshold] (Ftd) page 56,
[Freq. threshold 2] (F2d) page 56, [V. constant power] (UCP) page 65, [Freq. Const Power] (FCP) page 65,
[Nominal freq sync.] (FrSS) page 66, [Preset speed 8] (SP8) page 130, [Forced Run Ref.] (InHr) page 183.
nPr M [Rated motor power] According to drive
rating
According to drive
rating
The parameter cannot be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 63 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn)
Rated motor power given on the nameplate, in kW if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) = [50 Hz IEC] (50),
in HP if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) = [60 Hz NEMA] (60).
UnS M [Rated motor volt.] According to drive
rating
According to drive
mot. freq] (bFr)
Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate.
ATV61pppM3X: 100 to 240 V
ATV61pppN4: 200 to 480 V
nCr M [Rated mot. current] 0.25 to 1.1 or 1.2 In
(1) according to rating
According to drive
mot. freq] (bFr)
Rated motor current given on the nameplate.
FrS M [Rated motor freq.] 10 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
50 Hz
Rated motor frequency given on the nameplate.
The maximum value is limited to 500 Hz if [Motor control type] (Ctt) (page 63) is not V/F or if the drive rating is
higher than ATV61HD37.
Values between 500 Hz and 1,000 Hz are only possible in V/F control and for powers limited to 37 kW (50 HP).
In this case, configure [Motor control type] (Ctt) before [Rated motor freq.] (FrS).

61
nSP M [Rated motor speed] 0 to 60,000 rpm According to drive
rating
0 to 9,999 rpm then 10.00 to 60.00 krpm on the integrated display terminal.
If, rather than the rated speed, the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %,
calculate the rated speed as follows:
• Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x
or
or
tFr M [Max frequency] 10 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
60 Hz
The maximum value is limited by the following conditions:
• It must not exceed 10 times the value of de [Rated motor freq.] (FrS)
• It must not exceed 500 Hz if [Motor control type] (Ctt) (page 63) is not V/F or if the drive rating is higher than
ATV61HD37.
Values between 500 Hz and 1,000 Hz are only possible in V/F control and for powers limited to 37 kW
(50 HP) for the ATV61H ppp and 45 kW (60 HP) for the ATV61Wppp. In this case, configure [Motor control
type] (Ctt) before [Max frequency] (tFr).
100 - slip as a %
100
50 - slip in Hz
50
60 - slip in Hz
60

62
(1)The parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
tUn M [Auto tuning] [No] (nO)
nO
YES
dOnE
v [No] (nO): Auto-tuning not performed.
v [Yes] (YES): Auto-tuning is performed as soon as possible, then the parameter automatically changes
to [Done] (dOnE).
v [Done] (dOnE): Use of the values given the last time auto-tuning was performed.
Caution:
• It is essential that all the motor parameters are correctly configured before starting auto-tuning.
- Asynchronous motor: [Rated motor volt.] (UnS), [Rated motor freq.] (FrS), [Rated mot. current] (nCr),
[Rated motor speed] (nSP), [Rated motor power] (nPr)
- Synchronous motor: [Nominal I sync.] (nCrS), [Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS), [Pole pairs] (PPnS),
[Syn. EMF constant] (PHS), [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS), [Autotune L q-axis] (LqS)
If one or more of these parameters is modified after auto-tuning has been performed, [Auto tuning] (tUn) will
return to [No] (nO) and the procedure must be repeated.
• Auto-tuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated. If a “freewheel stop” or “fast stop”
function has been assigned to a logic input, this input must be set to 1 (active at 0).
• Auto-tuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands, which will be taken into account after the
auto-tuning sequence.
• If auto-tuning fails, the drive displays [No] (nO) and, depending on the configuration of [Autotune fault mgt]
(tnL) page 186, may switch to [Auto-tuning] (tnF) fault mode.
• Auto-tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds. Do not interrupt the process. Wait for the display to change to
“[Done] (dOnE)” or “[No] (nO)”.
Note: During auto-tuning the motor operates at rated current.
AUt M [Automatic autotune] [No] (nO)
nO
YES
v [Yes] (YES): Auto-tuning is performed on every power-up.
Caution: Same comments as for [Auto tuning] (tUn) above.
tUS M [Auto tuning status] [Not done] (tAb)
tAb
PEnd
PrOG
FAIL
dOnE
CUS
For information only, cannot be modified.
v [Not done] (tAb): The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor.
v [Pending] (PEnd): Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet performed.
v [In Progress] (PrOG): Auto-tuning in progress
v [Failed] (FAIL): Auto-tuning has failed.
v [Done] (dOnE): The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor.
v [Customized] (CUS): Auto-tuning has been performed, but at least one parameter set by this auto-tuning
operation has subsequently been modified. The [Auto tuning] (tUn) parameter then returns to [No] (nO).
The following auto-tuning parameters are concerned:
[Cust. stator R syn] (rSAS) page 66, [R1w] (rSA), [Idw] (IdA), [LFw] (LFA) and [T2w] (trA) page 68.
PHr M [Output Ph rotation] ABC
AbC
ACb
v [ABC] (AbC): Forward
v [ACB] (ACb): Reverse
This parameter can be used to reverse the direction of rotation of the motor without reversing the wiring.

63
Ctt M [Motor control type] [Energy Sav.] (nLd)
UUC
UF2
UF5
SYn
UFq
nLd
v [SVC V] (UUC): Open-loop voltage flux vector control. It supports operation with a number of motors
connected in parallel on the same drive.
v [V/F 2pts] (UF2): Simple V/F profile without slip compensation. It supports operation with:
- Special motors (wound rotor, tapered rotor, etc.)
- A number of motors in parallel on the same drive
- High-speed motors
- Motors with a low power rating in comparison to that of the drive
v [V/F 5pts] (UF5): 5-segment V/F profile: As V/F 2 pts profile but also supports the avoidance of resonance
(saturation).
v [Sync. mot.] (SYn): For synchronous permanent magnet motors with sinusoidal electromotive force (EMF)
only. This selection cannot be made at and above 55 kW (75 HP) for the ATV61pppM3X and at and above
90 kW (120 HP) for the ATV61pppN4.
This selection makes the asynchronous motor parameters inaccessible, and the synchronous motor
parameters accessible.
v [U/F Quad.] (UFq): Variable torque. For pump and fan applications.
v [Energy Sav.] (nLd): Energy saving. For variable torque or constant torque applications not requiring high
dynamics. This type of control is recommended when replacing an ATV38..
Voltage
Frequency
FrS
UnS
U0
The profile is defined by
the values of parameters
UnS, FrS and U0.
Voltage
Frequency
FrS
UnS
U5
U4
U3
U1
U2
U0
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
FrS > F5 > F4 > F3 > F2 > F1
The profile is defined
by the values of
parameters UnS,
FrS, U0 to U5 and
F0 to F5.

64
PFL M [U/F Profile] 0 to 100% 20
Adjustment of the [U/F Quad.] (UFq) ratio. The parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type]
(Ctt) = [U/F Quad.] (UFq).
It defines the magnetizing current at zero frequency, as a % of the rated magnetizing current.
U0 M [U0] 0 to 600 or 1,000 V
according to rating
0
V/f ratio
The parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [V/F 2pts] (UF2) or [V/F 5pts] (UF5)
or [U/F Quad.] (UFq).
U1 M [U1] 0 to 600 or 1,000 V
according to rating
0
V/F profile setting. The parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [V/F 5pts] (UF5)
F1 M [F1] 0 to 1,000 Hz 0
U2 M [U2] 0 to 600 or 1,000 V
according to rating
0
F2 M [F2] 0 to 1,000 Hz 0
U3 M [U3] 0 to 600 or 1,000 V
according to rating
0
F3 M [F3] 0 to 1,000 Hz 0
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Frequency
FrS
PFL
0
100%
Magnetizing current

65
U4 M [U4] 0 to 600 or 1,000 V
according to rating
0
F4 M [F4] 0 to 1,000 Hz 0
U5 M [U5] 0 to 600 or 1,000 V
according to rating
0
F5 M [F5] 0 to 1,000 Hz 0
UC2 M [Vector Control 2pt] [No] (nO)
nO
YES
The parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [SVC V] (UUC) or [Energy Sav.] (nLd).
v [Yes] (YES): Function active.
Used in applications in which the motor rated speed and frequency need to be exceeded in order to optimize
operation at constant power, or when the maximum voltage of the motor needs to be limited to a value below
the line voltage.
The voltage/frequency profile must then be adapted in accordance with the motor's capabilities to operate at
maximum voltage UCP and maximum frequency FCP.
UCP M [V. constant power] According to drive
rating
According to drive
mot. freq] (bFr)
The parameter can be accessed if [Vector Control 2pt] (UC2) = [Yes] (YES)
FCP M [Freq. Const Power] According to drive
rating and [Rated
motor freq.] (FrS)
= [Standard mot. freq]
(bFr)
The parameter can be accessed if [Vector Control 2pt] (UC2) = [Yes] (YES)
Motor voltage
Frequency
Rated motor freq.
Max. voltage UCP
Freq. Const Power FCP
Rated motor volt. UnS

66
Synchronous motor parameters
These parameters can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 63 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn). In this case, the asynchronous motor
parameters cannot be accessed.
Synchronous motor parameters that can be accessed in [Expert] mode
nCrS M [Nominal I sync.] 0.25 to 1.1 or 1.2 Hz
according to rating (1)
According to drive
rating
Rated synchronous motor current given on the nameplate.
nSPS M [Nom motor spdsync] 0 to 60,000 rpm According to drive
rating
On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9,999 rpm then 10.00 to 60.00 krpm.
PPnS M [Pole pairs] 1 to 50 According to drive
rating
Number of pairs of poles on the synchronous motor.
PHS M [Syn. EMF constant] 0 to 6,553.5 According to drive
rating
Synchronous motor EMF constant, in mV per rpm.
LdS M [Autotune L d-axis] 0 to 655.3 According to drive
rating
Axis “d” stator inductance in mH.
On motors with smooth poles [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS) = [Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) = Stator inductance L.
LqS M [Autotune L q-axis] 0 to 655.3 According to drive
rating
Axis “q” stator inductance in mH.
On motors with smooth poles [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS) = [Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) = Stator inductance L.
rSAS M [Cust. stator R syn] According to drive
rating
According to drive
rating
Cold state stator resistance (per winding) The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto-tuning
operation, if it has been performed.
The value can be entered by the user, if he knows it.
Value in milliohms (mΩ) up to 75 kW (100 HP), in hundredths of milliohms (mΩ/100) above 75 kW (100 HP).
On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9,999 then 10.00 to 65.53 (10,000 to 65,536).
Code Name/Description
rSMS M [R1rS]
Cold state stator resistance (per winding), in read-only mode. This is the drive factory setting or the result
of the auto-tuning operation, if it has been performed.
Value in milliohms (mΩ) up to 75 kW (100 HP), in hundredths of milliohms (mΩ/100) above 75 kW (100 HP).
On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9,999 then 10.00 to 65.53 (10,000 to 65,536).
FrSS M [Nominal freq sync.]
Motor frequency at rated speed in Hz, calculated by the drive (rated motor frequency), in read-only mode.

67
UFr M [IR compensation] (1) 25 to 200% 100%
The parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is not [V/F 2pts] (UF2), [V/F 5pts] (UF5)
or [U/F Quad.] (UFq).
Used to optimize the torque at very low speed (increase [IR compensation] (UFr) if the torque is insufficient).
Check that the [IR compensation] (UFr) value is not too high when the motor is warm (risk of instability).
SLP M [Slip compensation] (1) 0 to 150% 100%
The parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is not [V/F 2pts] (UF2), [V/F 5pts] (UF5), [U/F Quad.]
(UFq) or [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
Adjusts the slip compensation around the value set by the rated motor speed.
The speeds given on motor nameplates are not necessarily exact.
• If slip setting < actual slip: The motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state, but at a speed lower
than the reference.
• If slip setting > actual slip: The motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable.

68
Parameter can be accessed in [Expert] mode.
Asynchronous motor parameters that can be accessed in [Expert] mode
These parameters can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 63 is not [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
These include:
• Parameters calculated by the drive during auto-tuning, in read-only mode. For example, R1r, calculated cold stator resistance.
• The possibility of replacing some of these calculated parameters by other values, if necessary. For example, R1w, measured
cold stator resistance.
When a parameter Xyw is modified by the user, the drive uses it in place of the calculated parameter Xyr.
If auto-tuning is performed or if one of the motor parameters on which auto-tuning depends is modified ([Rated motor volt.] (UnS),
[Rated motor freq.] (FrS), [Rated mot. current] (nCr), [Rated motor speed] (nSP), [Rated motor power] (nPr)), parameters Xyw return to their
factory settings.
Prt M [Power Ident]
Parameter reserved for Schneider Electric product support. Do not modify.
To modify this parameter with the integrated terminal, press and hold down the “ENT” key for 2 s.
rSM M [Stator R measured]
Cold stator resistance, calculated by the drive, in read-only mode. Value in milliohms (mΩ) up to 75 kW
(100 HP), in hundredths of milliohms (mΩ/100) above 75 kW (100 HP).
IdM M [Idr]
Magnetizing current in A, calculated by the drive, in read-only mode.
LFM M [Lfr]
Leakage inductance in mH, calculated by the drive, in read-only mode.
trM M [T2r]
Rotor time constant in mS, calculated by the drive, in read-only mode.
nSL M [Nominal motor slip]
Rated slip in Hz, calculated by the drive, in read-only mode.
To modify the rated slip, modify the [Rated motor speed] (nSP) (page 61).
PPn M [Pr]
Number of pairs of poles, calculated by the drive, in read-only mode.
rSA M [R1w]
Cold state stator resistance (per winding), modifiable value. In milliohms (mΩ) up to 75 kW (100 HP),
in hundredths of milliohms (mΩ/100) above 75 kW (100 HP). On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9,999
then 10.00 to 65.53 (10,000 to 65,536).
IdA M [Idw]
Magnetizing current in A, modifiable value.
LFA M [Lfw]
Leakage inductance in mH, modifiable value.
trA M [T2w]
Rotor time constant in mS, modifiable value.

69
Selecting the encoder
Follow the recommendations in the catalog and the Installation Manual.
(1)The encoder parameters can only be accessed if the encoder card has been inserted, and the available selections will depend
on the type of encoder card used. The encoder configuration can also be accessed in the [1.5- INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I/O) menu.
EnS M [Encoder type] [AABB] (AAbb)
nO
AAbb
Ab
A
To be configured in accordance with the type of card and encoder used (1).
v [----] (nO): Card missing.
v [AABB] (AAbb): For signals A, A-, B, B-.
v [AB] (Ab): For signals A, B.
v [A] (A): For signal A. Value cannot be accessed if [Encoder usage] (EnU) page 70 = [Spd fdk reg.] (rEG).
PGI M [Number of pulses] 100 to 5,000 1,024
Number of pulses per encoder revolution.
The parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted (1).

70
Encoder check procedure
1. Set up in open-loop mode, following the recommendations on page 6.
2. Set [Encoder usage] (EnU) = [No] (nO).
3. Set [Encoder type] (EnS) and [Number of pulses] (PGI) accordingly for the encoder used.
4. Set [Encoder check] (EnC) = [Yes] (YES)
5. Check that the rotation of the motor is safe.
6. Set the motor rotating at stabilized speed ≈ 15% of the rated speed for at least 3 seconds, and use the [1.2-MONITORING] (SUP-)
menu to monitor its behavior.
7. If it trips on an [Encoder fault] (EnF), [Encoder check] (EnC) returns to [No] (nO).
- Check [Number of pulses] (PGI) and [Encoder type] (EnS).
- Check that the mechanical and electrical operation of the encoder, its power supply and connections are all correct.
- Reverse the direction of rotation of the motor ([Output Ph rotation] (PHr) parameter page 62) or the encoder signals.
8. Repeat the operations from 5 onwards until [Encoder check] (EnC) changes to [Done] (dOnE).
(1)The encoder parameters can only be accessed if the encoder card has been inserted, and the available selections will depend
on the type of encoder card used. The encoder configuration can also be accessed in the [1.5- INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I/O) menu.
EnC M [Encoder check] [Not done] (nO)
nO
YES
dOnE
Encoder feedback check See the procedure below.
v [Not done] (nO) Check not performed.
v [Yes] (YES): Activates monitoring of the encoder.
v [Done] (dOnE): Check performed successfully.
The check procedure checks:
- The direction of rotation of the encoder/motor
- The presence of signals (wiring continuity)
- The number of pulses/revolution
If a fault is detected, the drive locks in [Encoder fault] (EnF) fault mode.
EnU M [Encoder usage] [No] (nO)
nO
SEC
rEG
PGr
v [Fdbk monit.] (SEC): The encoder provides speed feedback for monitoring only.
v [Spd fdk reg.] (rEG): The encoder provides speed feedback for regulation and monitoring. If [Motor control
type] (Ctt) = [SVC U] (UUC) the encoder operates in speed feedback mode and enables static correction of
the speed to be performed. This configuration is not accessible for other [Motor control type] (Ctt) values.
v [Speed ref.] (PGr): The encoder provides a reference.

71
OFI M [Sinus filter] [No] (nO)
nO
YES
v [No] (nO): No sinus filter
v [Yes] (YES): Use of a sinus filter, to limit overvoltages on the motor and reduce the ground fault leakage
current.
[Sinus filter] (OFI) is forced to [No] (nO) in the following instances:
• ATV61p075pp ratings
• At and above 55 kW (75 HP) for the ATV61HpppM3X and at and above 90 kW (120 HP) for the
ATV61HpppN4, if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is not [U/F Quad.] (UFq) or [V/F 2pts] (UF2) or [V/F 5pts] (UF5).
• At and above 75 kW (100 HP) for the ATV61WpppM3X and at and above 110 kW (150 HP) for the
ATV61WpppN4, if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is not [U/F Quad.] (UFq) or [V/F 2pts] (UF2) or [V/F 5pts] (UF5).
Note: If [Sinus filter] (OFI) = [Yes] (YES), [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 63 must not be [Sync. mot.]
(SYn), and [Max frequency] (tFr) must not exceed 100 Hz.
SFr M [Switching freq.] (1) According to rating According to rating
Switching frequency setting.
Note: In the event of excessive temperature rise, the drive will automatically reduce the switching
frequency and reset it once the temperature returns to normal.
Adjustment range: It can vary between 1 and 16 kHz, but the minimum and maximum values, as well as
the factory setting, can be limited in accordance with the type of drive (ATV61H or W), the rating and the
configuration of the [Sinus filter] (OFI) parameter above and [Motor surge limit.] (SUL) parameter page 72.
Adjustment with drive running:
- If the initial value is less than 2 kHz, it is not possible to increase it above 1.9 kHz while running.
- If the initial value is greater than or equal to 2 kHz, a minimum of 2 kHz must be maintained while running.
Adjustment with the drive stopped: No restrictions.
CLI M [Current Limitation] (1) 0 to 1.1 or 1.2 In (2)
according to rating
1.1 or 1.2 In (2)
according to rating
Used to limit the motor current.
Note: If the setting is less than 0.25 In, the drive may lock in [Output Phase Loss] (OPF) fault mode if
this has been enabled (see page 176). If it is less than the no-load motor current, the limitation no longer
has any effect.
nrd M [Noise reduction] According to rating
nO
YES
v [No] (nO): Fixed frequency. Factory setting and sole value possible at and above 55 kW (75 HP) for the
ATV61pppM3X and at and above 90 kW (120 HP) for the ATV61pppN4.
v [Yes] (YES): Frequency with random modulation. Factory setting up to 45 kW (60 HP) for the ATV61pppM3X
and up to 75 kW (100 HP) for the ATV61pppN4.
Random frequency modulation prevents any resonance, which may occur at a fixed frequency.
CAUTION
On ATV61p075N4 to U40N4 drives, if the RFI filters are disconnected (operation on an IT system), the
switching frequency of the drive must not exceed 4 kHz.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage.

72
The value of the “SOP” parameter corresponds to the attenuation time of the cable used. It is defined to prevent the superimposition
of voltage wave reflections resulting from long cable lengths. It limits overvoltages to twice the DC bus rated voltage.
The tables on the following page give examples of correspondence between the “SOP” parameter and the length of the cable between
the drive and the motor. For longer cable lengths, a sinus filter or a dV/dt protection filter must be used.
• For motors in parallel, the sum of all the cable lengths must be taken into consideration. Compare the length given in the line
corresponding to the power for one motor with that corresponding to the total power, and select the shorter length. Example:
Two 7.5 kW (10 HP) motors – take the lengths on the 15 kW (20 HP) line, which are shorter than those on the 7.5 kW (10 HP) line,
and divide by the number of motors to obtain the length per motor (with unshielded “GORSE” cable and SOP = 6, the result is 40/2
= 20 m maximum for each 7.5 kW (10 HP) motor).
In special cases (for example, different types of cable, different motor powers in parallel, different cable lengths in parallel, etc.),
we recommend using an oscilloscope to check the overvoltage values obtained at the motor terminals.
To retain the overall drive performance, do not increase the SOP value unnecessarily.
SUL M [Motor surge limit.] [No] (nO)
nO
YES
This function limits motor overvoltages and is useful in the following applications:
- NEMA motors
- Japanese motors
- Spindle motors
- Rewound motors
v [Yes] (YES): Function active
This parameter is forced to [No] (nO) if a sinus filter is used.
This parameter can remain = [No] (nO) for 230/400 V motors used at 230 V, or if the length of cable between
the drive and the motor does not exceed:
- 4 m with unshielded cables
- 10 m with shielded cables
SOP M [Volt surge limit. opt] 10 (μs)
Optimization parameter for transient overvoltages at the motor terminals. Accessible if [Motor surge limit.]
(SUL) = [Yes] (YES).
Set to 6, 8, or 10 (μs), according to the following table.

73
Tables giving the correspondence between the SOP parameter and the cable length,
for 400 V line supply
Note: For 230/400 V used at 230 V, the [Motor surge limit.] (SUL) parameter can remain = [No] (nO).
Altivar 61 Motor Cable cross-section Maximum cable length in meters
reference Power Unshielded “GORSE” cable
Type H07 RN-F 4Gxx
Shielded “GORSE” cable
Type GVCSTV-LS/LH
kW HP in mm2
AWG SOP = 10 SOP = 8 SOP = 6 SOP = 10 SOP = 8 SOP = 6
ATV61H075N4 0.75 1 1.5 14 100 m 70 m 45 m 105 m 85 m 65 m
ATV61HU15N4 1.5 2 1.5 14 100 m 70 m 45 m 105 m 85 m 65 m
ATV61HU22N4 2.2 3 1.5 14 110 m 65 m 45 m 105 m 85 m 65 m
ATV61HU30N4 3 - 1.5 14 110 m 65 m 45 m 105 m 85 m 65 m
ATV61HU40N4 4 5 1.5 14 110 m 65 m 45 m 105 m 85 m 65 m
ATV61HU55N4 5.5 7.5 2.5 14 120 m 65 m 45 m 105 m 85 m 65 m
ATV61HU75N4 7.5 10 2.5 14 120 m 65 m 45 m 105 m 85 m 65 m
ATV61HD11N4 11 15 6 10 115 m 60 m 45 m 100 m 75 m 55 m
ATV61HD15N4 15 20 10 8 105 m 60 m 40 m 100 m 70 m 50 m
ATV61HD18N4 18.5 25 10 8 115 m 60 m 35 m 150 m 75 m 50 m
ATV61HD22N4 22 30 16 6 150 m 60 m 40 m 150 m 70 m 50 m
ATV61HD30N4 30 40 25 4 150 m 55 m 35 m 150 m 70 m 50 m
ATV61HD37N4 37 50 35 5 200 m 65 m 50 m 150 m 70 m 50 m
ATV61HD45N4 45 60 50 0 200 m 55 m 30 m 150 m 60 m 40 m
ATV61HD55N4 55 75 70 2/0 200 m 50 m 25 m 150 m 55 m 30 m
ATV61HD75N4 75 100 95 4/0 200 m 45 m 25 m 150 m 55 m 30 m
Altivar 61 Motor Cable cross-section Maximum cable length in meters
reference Power Shielded “BELDEN” cable
Type 2950x
Shielded “PROTOFLEX” cable
Type EMV 2YSLCY-J
kW HP in mm2
AWG SOP = 10 SOP = 8 SOP = 6 SOP = 10 SOP = 8 SOP = 6
ATV61H075N4 0.75 1 1.5 14 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV61HU15N4 1.5 2 1.5 14 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV61HU22N4 2.2 3 1.5 14 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV61HU30N4 3 - 1.5 14 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV61HU40N4 4 5 1.5 14 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV61HU55N4 5.5 7.5 2.5 14 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV61HU75N4 7.5 10 2.5 14 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV61HD11N4 11 15 6 10 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV61HD15N4 15 20 10 8 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV61HD18N4 18.5 25 10 8 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV61HD22N4 22 30 16 6 75 m 40 m 25 m
ATV61HD30N4 30 40 25 4 75 m 40 m 25 m
ATV61HD37N4 37 50 35 5 75 m 40 m 25 m
ATV61HD45N4 45 60 50 0 75 m 40 m 25 m
ATV61HD55N4 55 75 70 2/0 75 m 30 m 15 m
ATV61HD75N4 75 100 95 4/0 75 m 30 m 15 m

74
Ubr M [Braking level] According to drive
voltage rating
DC bus voltage threshold above which the braking transistor cuts in to limit this voltage.
ATV61ppppM3p: factory setting 395 V.
ATV61ppppN4: factory setting 785 V.
The adjustment range depends on the voltage rating of the drive and the [Mains voltage] (UrES) parameter,
page 180.
bbA M [Braking balance] [No] (nO)
nO
YES
v [Yes] (YES): Function active, to be used on drives connected in parallel via their DC bus. Used to balance the
braking power between the drives. The [Braking level] (Ubr) parameter, page 74, must be set to the same value
on the various drives.
The value [Yes] (YES) is only possible up to 45 kW (60 HP) for the ATV61pppM3X and up to 75 kW (100 HP)
for the ATV61pppN4, and if [Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) = [No] (nO) (see page 122).

75
[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
ENT
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
ENT
2/3 wire control
2 wire type
Reverse assign.
LI1 CONFIGURATION
LIx CONFIGURATION
Code << >> T/K
XXX
CtL-
SIM-
I-O-
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ENT
ESC
LAC-
INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
Power-up

76
The parameters in the [1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-) menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command
is present.
tCC M [2/3 wire control] [2 wire] (2C)
2C
3C
v [2 wire] (2C)
v [3 wire] (3C)
2-wire control: This is the input state (0 or 1) or edge (0 to 1 or 1 to 0), which controls running or stopping.
LI1: forward
LIx: reverse
3-wire control (pulse control): A “forward” or “reverse” pulse is sufficient to command starting, a “stop” pulse is
sufficient to command stopping.
LI1: stop
LI2: forward
LIx: reverse
tCt M [2 wire type] [Transition] (trn)
LEL
trn
PFO
v [Level] (LEL): State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run (1) or stop (0).
v [Transition] (trn): A change of state (transition or edge) is necessary to initiate operation, in order to prevent
accidental restarts after a break in the power supply.
v [Fwd priority] (PFO): State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop, but the “forward” input always takes
priority over the “reverse” input.
rrS M [Reverse assign.] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
C101
-
-
-
Cd00
-
v [No] (nO): Not assigned
v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
v [LI7] (LI7) to [LI10] (LI10): If VW3A3201 logic I/O card has been inserted
v [LI11] (LI11) to [LI14] (LI14): If VW3A3202 extended I/O card has been inserted
v [C101] (C101) to [C115] (C115): With integrated Modbus in [I/O profile] (IO)
v [C201] (C201) to [C215] (C215): With integrated CANopen in [I/O profile] (IO)
v [C301] (C301) to [C315] (C315): With a communication card in [I/O profile] (IO)
v [C401] (C401) to [C415] (C415): With a Controller Inside card in [I/O profile] (IO)
v [CD00] (Cd00) to [CD13] (Cd13): In [I/O profile] (IO) can be switched with possible logic inputs
v [CD14] (Cd14) to [CD15] (Cd15): In [I/O profile] (IO) can be switched without logic inputs
Assignment of the reverse direction command.
+24 LI1 LIx
ATV 71
+24 LI1 LI2 LIx
ATV 71
WARNING
To change the assignment of [2/3 wire control] (tCC) press the “ENT” key for 2 s.
It causes the following functions to return to factory setting: [2 wire type] (tCt) and [Reverse assign.]
(rrS) below, and all functions which assign logic inputs and analog inputs.
The macro configuration selected will also be reset if it has been customized (loss of custom settings).
It is advisable to configure this parameter before configuring the [1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-) and
[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menus.
Check that this change is compatible with the wiring diagram used.

77
L1- b [LI1 CONFIGURATION]
L1A M [LI1 assignment]
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured.
It displays all the functions that are assigned to input LI1 in order to check multiple assignments.
L1d M [LI1 On Delay] 0 to 200 ms 0
This parameter is used to take account of the change of the logic input to state 1 with a delay that can
be adjusted between 0 and 200 milliseconds, in order to filter out possible interference. The change to
state 0 is taken into account without delay.
L-- b [LIx CONFIGURATION]
All the logic inputs available on the drive are processed as in the example for LI1 above, up to LI6, LI10
or LI14, depending on whether or not option cards have been inserted.
WARNING
Check that the delay set does not pose a risk or lead to undesired operation.
The relative order in which these inputs are taken into account may be modified according to the delay
values of the various logic inputs, and thus lead to unintended operation.

78
Configuration of analog inputs and Pulse input
The minimum and maximum input values (in volts, mA, etc.) are converted to% in order to adapt the references to the application.
Minimum and maximum input values:
The minimum value corresponds to a reference of 0% and the maximum value to a reference of 100%. The minimum value may be greater
than the maximum value:
For +/- bidirectional inputs, the min. and max. are relative to the absolute value, for example, +/- 2 to 8 V.
Negative min. value of Pulse input:
Range (output values): For analog inputs only
This parameter is used to configure the reference range to [0% V 100%] or [-100% V +100%] in order to obtain a bidirectional output from
a unidirectional input.
Reference
100%
0%
[Min value]
(CrLx or
ULx or PIL)
[Max value]
(CrHx or
UHx or PFr)
20 mA or
10 V or
30.00 kHz
Reference
100%
0%
[Min value]
(CrLx or
ULx or PIL)
[Max value]
(CrHx or
UHx or PFr)
Current or
voltage or
frequency
input
Current or
voltage or
frequency
input
20 mA or
10 V or
30.00 kHz
Reference
100%
0%[RP min
value] (PIL)
[RP max value]
(PFr)
30.00
kHz
Frequency
input
-30.00
kHz
Reference
100%
0%
[Min value] [Max value]
Range 0 V 100%
Reference
100%
0%
[Min value]
[Max value]
Current
or
voltage
input
Current
or
voltage
input
-100%
Range -100% V +100%
20 mA
or 10 V
20 mA
or 10 V

79
bSP M [Reference template] [Standard] (bSd)
bSd
bLS
bnS
bnS0
v [Standard] (bSd)
At zero reference the frequency = LSP
v [Pedestal] (bLS)
At reference = 0 to LSP the frequency = LSP
v [Deadband] (bnS)
At reference = 0 to LSP the frequency = 0
v [Deadband 0] (bnS0)
This operation is the same as [Standard]
(bSd), except that in the following cases
at zero reference, the frequency = 0:
• The signal is less than [Min value], which is
greater than 0 (example 1 V on a 2 - 10 V input)
• The signal is greater than [Min value], which
is greater than [Max value] (example 11 V on
a 10 - 0 V input).
If the input range is configured as
“bidirectional”, operation remains
identical to [Standard] (bSd).
This parameter defines how the speed reference is taken into account, for analog inputs and Pulse
input only. In the case of the PID regulator, this is the PID output reference.
The limits are set by the [Low speed] (LSP) and [High speed] (HSP) parameters, page 34
Frequency
reference
LSP
-100%
+100%
HSP
LSP
HSP
0%
Frequency
reference
LSP
-100%
+100%
HSP
LSP
HSP
Frequency
reference
LSP-100%
+100%
HSP
LSP
HSP
0
Frequency
reference
LSP
-100%
+100%
HSP
LSP
HSP
0%

80
Delinearization: For analog inputs only
The input can be delinearized by configuring an intermediate point on the input/output curve of this input:
For range 0 V 100%
Note: For [Interm. point X], 0% corresponds to [Min value] and 100% to [Max value]
For range -100% V 100%
reference
100%
0%
[Min value]
(0%)
[Interm.
point X]
[Max value]
(100%)
current
or
voltage
input
[Interm. point Y]
20 mA
or 10 V
reference
100%
0%
[Min value]
(- 100%)
[Interm.
point X]
[Max value]
(100%)
current
or
voltage input
[Interm. point Y]
- [Interm. point Y]
- 100%
- [Interm.
point X]
0% 20 mA
or 10 V

81
AI1 - b [AI1 CONFIGURATION]
AI1A M [AI1 assignment]
It displays all the functions associated with input AI1 in order to check, for example, for compatibility
problems.
AI1t M [AI1 Type] [Voltage] (10U)
10U
n10U
v [Voltage] (10U): Positive voltage input (negative values are considered as zero: the input is
unidirectional).
v [Voltage +/-] (n10U): Positive and negative voltage input (the input is bidirectional).
UIL1 M [AI1 min value] 0 to 10.0 V 0 V
UIH1 M [AI1 max value] 0 to 10.0 V 10.0 V
AI1F M [AI1 filter] 0 to 10.00 s 0 s
Interference filtering.
AI1E M [AI1 Interm. point X] 0 to 100% 0%
Input delinearization point coordinate.
• 0% corresponds to [AI1 min value] (UIL1).
• 100% corresponds to [AI1 max value] (UIH1).
AI1S M [AI1 Interm. point Y] 0 to 100% 0%
Output delinearization point coordinate (frequency reference).

82
AI2- b [AI2 CONFIGURATION]
problems.
AI2t M [AI2 Type] [Current] (0 A)
10U
0A
v [Voltage] (10U): Voltage input
v [Current] (0 A): Current input
CrL2 M [AI2 min. value] 0 to 20.0 mA 0 mA
The parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] (AI2t) = [Current] (0 A)
UIL2 M [AI2 min. value] 0 to 10.0 V 0 V
The parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] (AI2t) = [Voltage] (10U)
CrH2 M [AI2 max. value] 0 to 20.0 mA 20.0 mA
UIH2 M [AI2 max. value] 0 to 10.0 V 10.0 V
AI2L M [AI2 range] [0 – 100%] (POS)
POS
nEG
v [0 – 100%] (POS): Unidirectional input
v [+/- 100%] (nEG): Bidirectional input
Example: On a 0/10 V input
- 0 V corresponds to reference -100%
- 5 V corresponds to reference 0%
- 10 V corresponds to reference +100%
• 0% corresponds to [Min value] if the range is 0 V 100%.
• 0% corresponds to if the range is -100% V +100%.
• 100% corresponds to [Max value].
[Max value] + [Min value]
2

83
Can be accessed if a VW3A3202 option card has been inserted
problems.
AI3t M [AI3 Type] [Current] (0 A)
0A
CrL3 M [AI3 min. value] 0 to 20.0 mA 0 mA
CrH3 M [AI3 max. value] 0 to 20.0 mA 20.0 mA
POS
nEG
Example: On a 4 – 20 mA input
- 4 mA corresponds to reference -100%
- 12 mA corresponds to reference 0%
- 20 mA corresponds to reference +100%
Since AI3 is, in physical terms, a bidirectional input, the [+/- 100%] (nEG) configuration must only be used if
the signal applied is unidirectional. A bidirectional signal is not compatible with a bidirectional configuration.
• 0% corresponds to [Min value] (CrL3) if the range is 0 V 100%.
• 0% corresponds to if the range is -100% V +100%.
• 100% corresponds to [AI3 max. value] (CrH3).
[AI3 max. value] (CrH3) - [AI3 min. value] (CrL3)
2

84
problems.
AI4t M [AI4 Type] [Voltage] (10U)
10U
0A
v [Voltage] (10U): Voltage input
CrL4 M [AI4 min value] 0 to 20.0 mA 0 mA
UIL4 M [AI4 min value] 0 to 10.0 V 0 V
CrH4 M [AI4 max value] 0 to 20.0 mA 20.0 mA
UIH4 M [AI4 max value] 0 to 10.0 V 10.0 V
POS
nEG
Example: On a 0/10 V input
- 0 V corresponds to reference -100%
- 5 V corresponds to reference 0%
- 10 V corresponds to reference +100%
AI4E M [AI4 Interm.point X] 0 to 100% 0%
• 0% corresponds to [Min value] if the range is 0 V 100%.
• 0% corresponds to if the range is -100% V + 100%.
• 100% corresponds to [Max value].
AI4S M [AI4 Interm.point Y] 0 to 100% 0%
[Max value] + [Min value]
2

85
PLI- b [RP CONFIGURATION]
PIA M [RP assignment]
It displays all the functions associated with the Pulse In input in order to check, for example, for compatibility
problems.
PIL M [RP min value] - 30.00 to 30.00 kHz 0
Frequency corresponding to the minimum speed
PFr M [RP max value] 0 to 30.00 kHz 30.00 kHz
Frequency corresponding to the maximum speed
PFI M [RP filter] 0 to 1,000 ms 0

86
Configuration of the encoder input serving as a reference, with a frequency
generator
This reference is not signed, therefore the directions of operation must be given via the control channel (logic inputs, for example).
Minimum and maximum values (input values):
The minimum value corresponds to a minimum reference of 0% and the maximum value to a maximum reference of 100%. The minimum
value may be greater than the maximum value. It may also be negative.
A reference can be obtained at zero frequency by assigning a negative value to the minimum value.
Reference
100%
0
[Freq. min.
value]
(EIL)
[Freq. max.
value]
(EFr)
300 kHz
Reference
100%
0
[Freq. min.
value]
(EIL)
[Freq. max.
value]
(EFr)
Frequency
input
Frequency
input
300 kHz
Reference
100%
[Freq. min.
value]
(EIL)
[Freq. max.
value]
(EFr)
300 kHz
Frequency
input0

87
The encoder configuration can also be accessed in the [1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu.
IEn- b [ENCODER CONFIGURATION]
The encoder parameters can only be accessed if the encoder card has been inserted, and the available
selections will depend on the type of encoder card used.
EnS M [Encoder type] [AABB] (AAbb)
nO
AAbb
Ab
A
The parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted.
To be configured in accordance with the type of encoder used.
v [----] (nO): Card missing.
v [AABB] (AAbb): For signals A, A-, B, B-.
v [AB] (Ab): For signals A, B.
v [A] (A): For signal A. Value cannot be accessed if [Encoder usage] (EnU) page 88 = [Spd fdk reg.] (rEG).
EnC M [Encoder check] [Not done] (nO)
nO
YES
dOnE
Encoder feedback check See procedure page 70.
The parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted and if [Encoder usage] (EnU) page 88
is not [Speed ref.] (PGr).
v [Not done] (nO) Check not performed.
v [Yes] (YES): Activates monitoring of the encoder.
v [Done] (dOnE): Check performed successfully.
The check procedure checks:
- The direction of rotation of the encoder/motor
- The presence of signals (wiring continuity)
- The number of pulses/revolution
If a fault is detected, the drive locks in [Encoder fault] (EnF) fault mode.

88
b [ENCODER CONFIGURATION] (continued)
EnU M [Encoder usage] [No] (nO)
nO
SEC
rEG
PGr
v [No] (nO): Function inactive, In this case, the other parameters cannot be accessed.
v [Fdbk monit.] (SEC): The encoder provides speed feedback for monitoring only.
v [Spd fdk reg.] (rEG): The encoder provides speed feedback for regulation and monitoring.
If [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [SVC U] (UUC) the encoder operates in speed feedback mode and
enables static correction of the speed to be performed. This configuration is not accessible for
other [Motor control type] (Ctt) values.
v [Speed ref.] (PGr): The encoder provides a reference.
PGI M [Number of pulses] 100 to 5,000 1,024
Number of pulses per encoder revolution.
PGA M [Reference type] [Encoder] (EnC)
EnC
PtG
The parameter can be accessed if [Encoder usage] (EnU) = [Speed ref.] (PGr).
v [Encoder] (EnC): Use of an encoder.
v [Freq. gen.] (PtG): Use of a frequency generator (unsigned reference).
EIL M [Freq. min. value] - 300 to 300 kHz 0
The parameter can be accessed if [Encoder usage] (EnU) = [Speed ref.] (PGr) and if [Reference type]
(PGA) = [Freq. gen.] (PtG).
Frequency corresponding to the minimum speed
EFr M [Freq. max value] 0.00 to 300 kHz 300 kHz
The parameter can be accessed if [Encoder usage] (EnU) = [Speed ref.] (PGr) and if [Reference type]
(PGA) = [Freq. gen.] (PtG).
Frequency corresponding to the maximum speed
EFI M [Freq. signal filter] 0 to 1,000 ms 0
The parameter can be accessed if [Encoder usage] (EnU) = [Speed ref.] (PGr).

89
r1- b [R1 CONFIGURATION]
r1 M [R1 Assignment] [No drive flt] (FLt)
nO
FLt
rUn
FtA
FLA
CtA
SrA
tSA
PEE
PFA
AP2
F2A
tAd
rtAH
rtAL
FtAL
F2AL
CtAL
ULA
OLA
PFAH
PFAL
PISH
Ern
tS2
tS3
bMP
v [No drive flt] (FLt): Drive not faulty (relay normally energized, and de-energized if there is a fault)
v [Drv running] (rUn): Drive running
v [Freq. Th. attain.] (FtA): The relay is closed if the frequency is greater than [Freq. threshold] (Ftd)
page 56.
v [HSP attain.] (FLA): High speed reached
v [Current Th. attained] (CtA): The relay is closed if the current is greater than [Current threshold] (Ctd)
page 56.
v [Freq.ref.att] (SrA): Frequency reference reached
v [Th.mot. att.] (tSA): Motor 1 thermal state reached
v [PID error al] (PEE): PID error alarm
v [PID fdbk al.] (PFA): PID feedback alarm (greater than [Max fbk alarm] (PAH) page 142 or less than
[Min fbk alarm] (PAL) page 142)
v [AI2 Al. 4-20] (AP2): Alarm indicating absence of 4-20 mA signal on input AI2
v [Freq. Th. 2 attain.] (F2A): The relay is closed if the frequency is greater than [Freq. threshold 2] (F2d)
page 56.
v [Th.drv.att.] (tAd): Drive thermal state reached
v [High Reference Att.] (rtAH): The relay is closed if the frequency reference is greater than [High Freq.
Ref. Thr.] (rtd) page 56.
v [Low Reference Att.] (rtAL): The relay is closed if the frequency reference is less than [Low Freq. Ref.
Thr.] (rtdL) page 56.
v [Low Frq. Th. Attain.] (FtAL): The relay is closed if the frequency is less than [Low Freq.Threshold]
(FtdL) page 56.
v [2Low F.Thld] (F2AL): The relay is closed if the frequency is less than [2 Freq. Threshold] (F2dL)
page 56.
v [Low I Th.At.] (CtAL): The relay is closed if the current is less than [Low I Threshold] (CtdL) page 56.
v [Pro.Undload] (ULA): Process underload (see page 188)
v [Ovld.P.Alrm] (OLA): Process overload (see page 190)
v [PID high Al.] (PFAH): PID feedback alarm (greater than [Max fbk alarm] (PAH) page 142).
v [PID low Alarm] (PFAL): PID feedback alarm (less than [Min fbk alarm] (PAL) page 142).
v [Regul.Alarm] (PISH): PID regulator feedback supervision fault page 145.
v [Emerg. Run] (Ern): The relay is closed if the drive is in emergency run. See [Forced Run] (InHS)
page 183.
v [Th.mot2 att.] (tS2): Motor 2 thermal state reached
v [Th.mot3 att] (tS3): Motor 3 thermal state reached
v [Rem.Cmd] (bMP): Control via the graphic display terminal is activated via a function key on the terminal.

90
r1- b [R1 CONFIGURATION] (continued)
r1 M [R1 Assignment] (continued)
AtS
CnF0
CnF1
CnF2
CFP1
CFP2
CFP3
dbL
brS
PrM
MCP
AG1
AG2
AG3
P1A
P2A
PLA
EFA
USA
UPA
tHA
SSA
tJA
bOA
APA
AP3
AP4
FSA
rdY
v [Neg Torque] (AtS): Negative torque (braking)
v [Cnfg.0 act.] (CnF0): Configuration 0 active
v [Set 1 active] (CFP1): Parameter set 1 active
v [DC charged] (dbL): DC bus loading
v [In braking] (brS): Drive braking
v [P. removed] (PRM): Drive locked by “Power removal” input
v [I present] (MCP): Motor current present
v [Alarm Grp 1] (AGI): Alarm group 1
v [Alarm Grp 2] (AG2): Alarm group 2
v [Alarm Grp 3] (AG3): Alarm group 3
v [PTC1 alarm] (P1A): Probe alarm 1
v [LI6=PTC al.] (PLA): LI6 = PTC probe alarms
v [Ext. fault al] (EFA): External fault alarm
v [Under V. al.] (USA): Undervoltage alarm
v [Uvolt warn] (UPA): Undervoltage warning
v [Al. °C drv] (tHA): Drive overheating
v [Lim T/I att.] (SSA): Torque limit alarm
v [IGBT al.] (tJA): IGBT alarm
v [Brake R. al.] (bOA): Braking resistor temperature alarm
v [Option al.] (APA): Alarm generated by the Controller Inside card
v [Flow Limit.] (FSA): Flow rate limiting active (see page 167)
v [Ready] (rdY): Drive ready

91
b [R1 CONFIGURATION] (continued)
r1d M [R1 Delay time] 0 to 9,999 ms 0
The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed, when the information
becomes true.
The delay cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt) assignment, and remains at 0.
r1S
POS
nEG
M [R1 Active at] [1] (POS)
Configuration of the operating logic:
v [1]: State 1 when the information is true
Configuration [1] (POS) cannot be modified for the [No drive flt] (FLt), assignment.
r1H M [R1 Holding time] 0 to 9,999 ms 0
becomes false.
The holding time cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt) assignment, and remains at 0.
r2 M [R2 Assignment] [Drv running] (rUn)
LLC
OCC
dCO
Identical to R1 (see page 89) with the addition of (shown for information only as these selections can only
be configured in the [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-)) menu:
v [Input cont.] (LLC): Line contactor control
v [Output cont] (OCC): Output contactor control
v [DC charging] (dCO): DC bus precharging contactor control
The delay cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt), [Output cont] (OCC), [DC charging] (dCO),
and [Input cont.] (LLC) assignments, and remains at 0.
becomes true.
r2S
POS
nEG
The [1] (POS) configuration cannot be modified for the[No drive flt] (FLt), [DC charging] (dCO)
and [Input cont.] (LLC), assignments.
The holding time cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt), [DC charging] (dCO) and [Input cont.] (LLC)
assignments, and remains at 0.
becomes false.

92
r3 M [R3 Assignment] [No] (nO)
Identical to R2
becomes true.
r3S
POS
nEG
becomes false.
r4 M [R4 Assignment] [No] (nO)
Identical to R2 (see page 91).
becomes true.
r4S
POS
nEG
The holding time cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt), [DC charging] (dCO) and [Input cont.]
(LLC) assignments, and remains at 0.
becomes false.

93
LO1- b [LO1 CONFIGURATION]
LO1 M [LO1 assignment] [No] (nO)
LLC
OCC
dCO
Identical to R1 (see page 89) with the addition of (shown for information only as these selections can only
be configured in the [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-)) menu:
v [Input cont.] (LLC): Line contactor control
v [Output cont] (OCC): Output contactor control
v [[DC charging] (dCO): DC bus precharging contactor control
LO1d M [LO1 delay time] 0 to 9,999 ms 0
becomes true.
LO1S
POS
nEG
M [LO1 active at] [1] (POS)
LO1H M [LO1 holding time] 0 to 9,999 ms 0
The holding time cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt), [DC charging] (dCO) and [Input cont.]
(LLC) assignments, and remains at 0.
becomes false.
Identical to LO1.
becomes true.
LO2S
POS
nEG
becomes false.

94
Identical to LO1 (see page 93).
becomes true.
LO3S
POS
nEG
becomes false.
Identical to LO1 (see page 93).
becomes true.
LO4S
POS
nEG
becomes false.

95
Configuration of analog outputs
Minimum and maximum values (output values):
The minimum output value, in volts or mA, corresponds to the lower limit of the assigned parameter and the maximum value corresponds
to its upper limit. The minimum value may be greater than the maximum value:
Outputs AO2 and AO3 configured as bipolar outputs:
The [min Output] (UOLx) and [max Output] (UOHx) parameters are absolute values, although they function symmetrically. In the case
of bipolar outputs, always set the maximum value higher than the minimum value.
Parameter assigned
Upper limit
[Min Output]
(AOLx or
UOLx)
[Max Output]
(AOHx or
UOHx)
20 mA
or
10 V
Parameter assigned
[Min Output]
(AOLx or
UOLx)
[Max Output]
(AOHx or
UOHx)
20 mA
or
10 V
Current
or voltage
output
Current
or voltage
output
Upper limit
Lower
limit
Lower
limit
Parameter
assigned
- 10 V
[Min Output]
(UOLx)
[Max Output]
(UOHx)
Voltage
output
Upper limit
Lower limit
+ 10 V

96
AO1- b [AO1 CONFIGURATION]
AO1 M [AO1 assignment] [Motor freq.] (OFr)
nO
OCr
OFr
OrP
trq
Stq
OrS
OPS
OPF
OPE
OPI
OPr
tHr
tHd
OFS
tHr2
tHr3
Utr
Str
tqL
UOP
v [I motor] (OCr): Current in the motor, between 0 and 2 In (In = rated drive current indicated in the
Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate).
v [Motor freq.] (OFr): Output frequency, between 0 and [Max frequency] (tFr)
v [Ramp out.] (OrP): Between 0 and [Max frequency] (tFr)
v [Motor torq.] (trq): Motor torque, between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque
v [Sign. torque] (Stq): Signed motor torque, between -3 and +3 times the rated motor torque
v [sign ramp] (OrS): Signed ramp output, between – [Max frequency] (tFr) and + [Max frequency] (tFr)
v [PID ref.] (OPS): PID regulator reference between [Min PID reference] (PIP1) and [Max PID
reference] (PIP2)
v [PID feedback] (OPF): PID regulator feedback between [Min PID feedback] (PIF1) and [Max PID
feedback] (PIF2)
v [PID error] (OPE): PID regulator error between -5% and +5% of ([Max PID feedback] (PIF2) –
[Min PID feedback] (PIF1))
v [PID output] (OPI): PID regulator output between [Low speed] (LSP) and [High speed] (HSP)
v [Mot. power] (OPr): Motor power, between 0 and 2.5 times [Rated motor power] (nPr)
v [Mot thermal] (tHr): Motor thermal state, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state
v [Drv thermal] (tHd): Drive thermal state, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state
v [Sig. o/p frq.] (OFS): Signed output frequency, between – [Max frequency] (tFr) and + [Max
frequency] (tFr)
v [Mot therm2] (tHr2): Thermal state of motor 2, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state
v [Mot therm3] (tHr3): Thermal state of motor 3, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state
v [Uns.TrqRef] (Utr): Torque reference, between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque
v [Sign trq ref.] (Str): Signed torque reference, between -3 and +3 times the rated motor torque
v [Torque lim.] (tqL): Torque limit, between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque
v [Motor volt.] (UOP): Voltage applied to the motor, between 0 and [Rated motor volt.] (UnS)
AO1t M [AO1 Type] [Current] (0 A)
10U
0A
v [Voltage] (10U): Voltage output
v [Current] (0 A): Current output
AOL1 M [AO1 min Output] 0 to 20.0 mA 0 mA
The parameter can be accessed if [AO1 Type] (AO1t) = [Current] (0 A)
AOH1 M [AO1 max Output] 0 to 20.0 mA 20.0 mA
UOL1 M [AO1 min Output] 0 to 10.0 V 0 V
The parameter can be accessed if [AO1 Type] (AO1t) = [Voltage] (10U)
UOH1 M [AO1 max Output] 0 to 10.0 V 10.0 V
The parameter can be accessed if [AO1 Type] (AO1t) = [Voltage] (10U)
AO1F M [AO1 Filter] 0 to 10.00 s 0 s

97
AO2 M [AO2 assignment] [No] (nO)
Same assignments as AO1
10U
0A
n10U
v [Voltage +/-] (n10U): Bipolar voltage output
The parameter can be accessed if [AO2 Type] (AO2t) = [Voltage] (10U) or [Voltage +/-] (n10U)
AO3 M [AO3 assignment] [No] (nO)
Same assignments as AO1
10U
0A
n10U
v [Voltage +/-] (n10U): Bipolar voltage output

98
The following submenus group the alarms into 1 to 3 groups, each of which can be assigned to a relay or a logic output for remote signaling.
These groups can also be displayed on the graphic display terminal (see [6 MONITORING CONFIG.] menu) and viewed via the
[1.2 MONITORING] (SUP) menu.
When one or a number of alarms selected in a group occurs, this alarm group is activated.
A1C-
b [ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION]
PLA
P1A
P2A
EFA
USA
CtA
CtAL
FtA
FtAL
F2A
F2AL
SrA
tSA
tS2
tS3
UPA
FLA
tHA
PEE
PFA
PFAH
PFAL
PISH
AP2
AP3
AP4
SSA
tAd
tJA
bOA
APA
UrA
rtAH
rtAL
ULA
OLA
FSA
Ern
Selection to be made from the following list:
v [LI6=PTC al.] (PLA): LI6 = PTC probe alarms
v [Ext. fault al] (EFA): External fault alarm
v [Under V. al.] (USA): Undervoltage alarm
v [I attained] (CtA): The current is greater than [Current threshold] (Ctd) page 56.
v [Low I Thres. Attain.] (CtAL): The current is less than [Low I Threshold] (CtdL) page 56.
v [Freq. Th. attain.] (FtA): The frequency is greater than [Freq. threshold] (Ftd) page 56.
v [Low Frq. Th. Attain.] (FtAL): The frequency is less than [Low Freq.Threshold] (FtdL) page 56.
v [Freq. Th. 2 attain.] (F2A): The frequency is greater than [Freq. threshold 2] (F2d) page 56.
v [Fq. Low Th. 2 attain] (F2AL): The frequency is less than [2 Freq. Threshold] (F2dL) page 56.
v [Freq.ref.att] (SrA): Frequency reference reached
v [Th.mot. att.] (tSA): Motor 1 thermal state reached
v [Th.mot2 att.] (tS2): Motor 2 thermal state reached
v [Th.mot3 att] (tS3): Motor 3 thermal state reached
v [Uvolt warn] (UPA): Undervoltage warning
v [HSP attain.] (FLA): High speed reached
v [Al. °C drv] (tHA): Drive overheating
v [PID error al] (PEE): PID error alarm
v [PID fdbk al.] (PFA): PID feedback alarm (greater than [Max fbk alarm] (PAH) page 142 or less than
[Min fbk alarm] (PAL) page 142)
v [PID high Alarm] (PFAH): PID feedback alarm (greater than [Max fbk alarm] (PAH) page 142).
v [PID low Alarm] (PFAL): PID feedback alarm (less than [Min fbk alarm] (PAL) page 142).
v [Regulation Alarm] (PISH): PID regulator feedback supervision fault page 145.
v [Lim T/I att.] (SSA): Torque limit alarm
v [Th.drv.att.] (tAd): Drive thermal state reached
v [IGBT alarm] (tJA): IGBT alarm
v [Brake R. al.] (bOA): Braking resistor temperature alarm
v [Option alarm] (APA): Alarm generated by an option card.
v [Regen. underV. al.] (UrA): Reserved.
v [High Reference Att.] (rtAH): The frequency reference is greater than [High Freq. Ref. Thr.] (rtd)
page 56.
v [Low Reference Att.] (rtAL): The frequency reference is less than [Low Freq. Ref. Thr.] (rtdL) page 56.
v [Underload. Proc. Al.] (ULA): Process underload (see page 188)
v [Overload. Proc. Al.] (OLA): Process overload (see page 190)
v [Flow Limit. active] (FSA): Flow rate limiting active (see page 167)
v [Emerg. Run] (Ern): Emergency run in progress (see page 183)
See the multiple selection procedure on page 22 for the integrated display terminal, and page 13 for the graphic
display terminal.
A2C-
Identical to [ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION] (A1C-)
A3C-
Identical to [ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION] (A1C-)

99
[1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-)
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
ENT
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
1.6 COMMAND
1.9 COMMUNICATION
1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
1.11 IDENTIFICATION
1.13 USER MENU
ENT
1.6 COMMAND
Ref.1 channel
RV Inhibition
Stop Key priority
Profile
Cmd switching
Code << >> T/K
XXX
SIM-
ESC
ESC
ENT
FUn-
LAC-
CtL-
I-O-
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ESC
COMMAND
Power-up

100
The parameters in the [1.6 COMMAND] (CtL) menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present.
Command and reference channels
Run commands (forward, reverse, stop, etc.) and references can be sent using the following channels:
The behavior of the Altivar 61 can be adapted according to requirements:
• [8 serie] (SE8): To replace an Altivar 58. See the Migration Manual.
• [Not separ.] (SIM): Command and reference are sent via the same channel.
• [Separate] (SEP): Command and reference may be sent via different channels.
In these configurations, control via the communication bus is performed in accordance with the DRIVECOM standard with only 5 freely-
assignable bits (see Communication Parameters Manual). The application functions cannot be accessed via the communication interface.
• [I/O profile] (IO): Command and reference may be sent via different channels. This configuration both simplifies and extends use via
the communication interface.
Commands may be sent via the logic inputs on the terminals or via the communication bus.
When commands are sent via a bus, they are available on a word, which acts as virtual terminals containing only logic inputs.
Application functions can be assigned to the bits in this word. More than one function can be assigned to the same bit.
Note: Stop commands from the terminals remain active even if the terminals are not the active command channel.
Note: The integrated Modbus channel has 2 physical communication ports:
- The Modbus network port
- The Modbus HMI port
The drive does not differentiate between these two ports, but recognizes the graphic display terminal irrespective of the port to
which it is connected.
Command Reference
• Terminals: Logic inputs LI
• Graphic display terminal
• Integrated Modbus
• Integrated CANopen
• Communication card
• Controller Inside card
• Terminals: Analog inputs AI, frequency input, encoder
• Graphic display terminal
• Integrated Modbus
• Integrated CANopen
• Communication card
• Controller Inside card
• +/- speed via the terminals
• +/- speed via the graphic display terminal

101
Reference channel for [Not separ.] (SIM), [Separate] (SEP) and [I/O profile] (IO)
configurations, PID not configured
References
Fr1, SA2, SA3, dA2, dA3, MA2, MA3:
• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen, communication card, Controller Inside card
Fr1b, for SEP and IO:
Fr1b, for SIM:
• Terminals, only accessible if Fr1 = terminals
Fr2:
• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen, communication card, Controller Inside card,
and +/-speed
Note: [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) and [Ref 1B switching] (rCb) must be configured in the [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-) menu.
H/>
72H
279/
:52
H2/
2H%
279
;-%
;-&
@-%
@-&
8-%
8-&
2H$
2H$>
+/- speed around
a reference
Preset speeds
Jog
operation
PID not assigned
Graphic
display
terminal
Forced local
Ramps
Parameter:
The black square represents
the factory setting assignment
Key:
Channel1
Channel2
[Ref 1B switching]
[Ref.1
channel]
[Ref.1B
channel]
[Summing ref. 2]
[Summing ref. 3]
[Subtract. ref. 2]
[Subtract. ref. 3]
[Multiplier ref. 2]
[Low speed]
[Multiplier ref. 3]
[PID REGULATOR]
AI1
[Ref.2 channel]
[Ref. 2
switching]
(FRA+SA2+SA3-dA2-dA3)xMA2xMA3
(SP1)
SP2
SP8
LI
LCC
FRA
nO
[High
speed]
nO
nO
nO
nO
FrH rFr
AI2
AI3
HSP
LSP
ACC DEC
AC2 DE2
LI
AI4
nO0V
Note: Forced local is not
active in [I/O profile].

102
Reference channel for [Not separ.] (SIM), [Separate] (SEP) and [I/O profile] (IO)
configurations, PID configured with PID references at the terminals
References
Fr1:
Fr1b, for SEP and IO:
Fr1b, for SIM:
• Terminals, only accessible if Fr1 = terminals
SA2, SA3, dA2, dA3:
• Terminals only
Fr2:
• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen, communication card, Controller Inside card,
and +/- speed
(1) Ramps not active if the PID function is active in automatic mode.
Note: [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) and [Ref 1B switching] (rCb) must be configured in the [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-) menu.
H/>
72H
279/
H2/
2H%
279
;-%
;-&
@-%
@-&
2H$
2H$>
Graphic
display
terminal
Ramps (1)
Parameter:
The black square represents the factory
setting assignment
Key:
Channel 1
Channel 2
PID
See page 137
A
Forced local
[Ref 1B switching]
[Ref.1
channel]
[Ref.1B channel]
[Summing
ref. 2]
[Summing ref. 3]
[Subtract. ref. 2]
[Subtract. ref. 3]
[Low speed]
AI1
[Ref.2 channel]
[Ref. 2 switching]
FRA+SA2+SA3-dA2-dA3
B
LCC
FRA
[High
speed]
nO
FrH rFr
AI2
AI3
HSP
LSP
ACC DEC
AC2 DE2
LI
AI4
nO0V

103
Command channel for [Not separ.] (SIM) configuration
Reference and command, not separate
The command channel is determined by the reference channel. Parameters Fr1, Fr2, rFC, FLO and FLOC are common to reference
and command.
Example: If the reference is Fr1 = AI1 (analog input at the terminals), control is via LI (logic input at the terminals).
279/
/4/2
H2/
2H%
279
:;I
2H$
(Stop Key
priority)
Forced local
Parameter:
The black square represents
the factory setting assignment.
Forward
Reverse
STOP
Graphic display
terminal
Key:
Graphic display
terminal
LI
AI1
(RUN/STOP
FWD/REV)
LCC
nO
AI2
AI3
LI
[Ref.1 channel]
[Ref.2 channel]
[Ref. 2 switching]
[Profile]
YES
SIM
STOP
CMD
LI
nO
AI4
nO

104
Command channel for [Separate] (SEP) configuration
Separate reference and command
Parameters FLO and FLOC are common to reference and command.
Example: If the reference is in forced local mode via AI1 (analog input at the terminals), command in
forced local mode is via LI (logic input at the terminals).
The command channels Cd1 and Cd2 are independent of the reference channels Fr1, Fr1b and Fr2.
Commands
Cd1, Cd2:
279/
/4/2
//;
/@%
279
:;I
/@$
(Stop Key
priority)
Forced local
Parameter:
The black rectangle represents the factory
setting assignment, except for [Profile].
Forward
Reverse
STOP
Graphic
display
terminal
Key:
Graphic
display
terminal
LI
AI1
(RUN/STOP
FWD/REV)
LCC
nO
AI2
AI3
[Cmd channel 1]
[Cmd channel 2]
[Cmd switching]
[Profile]
YES
SEP
STOP
CMD
LI
nO
AI4
nO

105
Command channel for [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
Separate reference and command, as in [Separate] (SEP) configuration
The command channels Cd1 and Cd2 are independent of the reference channels Fr1, Fr1b and Fr2.
Commands
Cd1, Cd2:
/4/2
//;
/@%
279
:;I
/@$
(Stop Key
priority)
Forced local
Parameter:
The black rectangle represents the factory
setting assignment, except for [Profile].
Forward
Reverse
STOP
Key:
Graphic
display
terminal
nO
[Cmd channel 1]
[Cmd channel 2]
[Cmd switching]
[Profile]
YES
I/O
STOP
CMD
LI
nO

106
Command channel for [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
Selection of a command channel:
A command or an action can be assigned:
• To a fixed channel by selecting an LI input or a Cxxx bit:
- By selecting e.g., LI3, this action will always be triggered by LI3 regardless of which command channel is switched.
- By selecting e.g., C214, this action will always be triggered by integrated CANopen with bit 14 regardless of which command
channel is switched.
• To a switchable channel by selecting a CDxx bit:
- By selecting, e.g., CD11, this action will be triggered by
LI12 if the terminals channel is active
C111 if the integrated Modbus channel is active
C211 if the integrated CANopen channel is active
C311 if the communication card channel is active
C411 if the Controller Inside card channel is active
If the active channel is the graphic display terminal, the functions and commands assigned to CDxx switchable internal bits are inactive.
Note:
• CD14 and CD15 can only be used for switching between 2 networks. They do not have equivalent logic inputs.
(1)If [2/3 wire control] (tCC) page 76 = [3 wire] (3C), LI2, C101, C201, C301, and C401 cannot be accessed.
Terminals Integrated Modbus Integrated CANopen
Communication
card
Controller Inside
card
Internal bit, can be
switched
CD00
LI2 (1) C101 (1) C201 (1) C301 (1) C401 (1) CD01
LI3 C102 C202 C302 C402 CD02
LI4 C103 C203 C303 C403 CD03
LI5 C104 C204 C304 C404 CD04
LI6 C105 C205 C305 C405 CD05
LI7 C106 C206 C306 C406 CD06
LI8 C107 C207 C307 C407 CD07
LI9 C108 C208 C308 C408 CD08
LI10 C109 C209 C309 C409 CD09
LI11 C110 C210 C310 C410 CD10
LI12 C111 C211 C311 C411 CD11
LI13 C112 C212 C312 C412 CD12
LI14 C113 C213 C313 C413 CD13
- C114 C214 C314 C414 CD14
- C115 C215 C315 C415 CD15

107
Assignment conditions for logic inputs and control bits
The following elements are available for every command or function that can be assigned to a logic input or a control bit:
Note: In [I/O profile] (IO) configuration, LI1 cannot be accessed and if [2/3 wire control] (tCC) page 76 = [3 wire] (3C), LI2, C101,
C201, C301, and C401 cannot be accessed either.
[LI1] (LI1)
to
[LI6] (LI6)
Drive with or without option
[LI7] (LI7)
to
[LI10] (LI10)
With VW3A3201 logic I/O card
[LI11] (LI11)
to
[LI14] (LI14)
With VW3A3202 extended I/O card
[C101] (C101)
to
[C110] (C110)
With integrated Modbus in [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
[C111] (C111)
to
[C115] (C115)
With integrated Modbus regardless of configuration
[C201] (C201)
to
[C210] (C210)
With integrated CANopen in [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
[C211] (C211)
to
[C215] (C215)
With integrated CANopen regardless of configuration
[C301] (C301)
to
[C310] (C310)
With a communication card in [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
[C311] (C311)
to
[C315] (C315)
With a communication card regardless of configuration
[C401] (C401)
to
[C410] (C410)
With Controller Inside card in [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
[C411] (C411)
to
[C415] (C415)
With Controller Inside card regardless of configuration
[CD00] (Cd00)
to
[CD10] (Cd10)
In [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
[CD11] (Cd11)
to
[CD15] (Cd15)
Regardless of configuration
WARNING
Inactive communication channels are not monitored (no lock following malfunction in the event of a communication bus
failure). Make sure that the commands and functions assigned to bits C101 to C415 will not pose a risk in the event of the
failure of the associated communication bus.

108
Fr1 M [Ref.1 channel] [AI1] (AI1)
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
LCC
Mdb
CAn
nEt
APP
PI
PG
v [AI1] (AI1): Analog input
v [AI3] (AI3): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
v [HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal
v [Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
v [CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen
v [Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
v [Prog. card] (APP): Controller Inside card (if inserted)
v [RP] (PI): Frequency input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
v [Encoder] (PG): Encoder input, if encoder card has been inserted
rIn M [RV Inhibition] [No] (nO)
nO
YES
v [No] (nO)
v [Yes] (YES)
Inhibition of movement in reverse direction, does not apply to direction requests sent by logic inputs.
- Reverse direction requests sent by logic inputs are taken into account.
- Reverse direction requests sent by the graphic display terminal are not taken into account.
- Reverse direction requests sent by the line are not taken into account.
- Any reverse speed reference originating from the PID, summing input, etc., is interpreted as a zero
reference.
PSt M [Stop Key priority] [Yes] (YES)
nO
YES
v [No] (nO)
v [Yes] (YES): Gives priority to the STOP key on the graphic display terminal when the graphic display
terminal is not enabled as the command channel.
Press and hold down ENT for 2 seconds in order for any change in the assignment of [Stop Key priority]
(PSt) to be taken into account.
This will be a freewheel stop. If the active command channel is the graphic display terminal, the stop
will be performed according to the [Type of stop] (Stt) page 123 irrespective of the configuration of
[Stop Key priority] (PSt).
CHCF M [Profile] [Not separ.] (SIM)
SE8
SIM
SEP
IO
v [8 serie] (SE8): ATV38 interchangeability (see Migration Manual). The [8 serie] (SE8) configuration is used
to load, via PowerSuite, for example, an ATV38 drive configuration in an ATV61 that has already been set to
this configuration. This assignment cannot be accessed if a Controller Inside card has been inserted.
Note: Modifications to the configuration of the ATV61 must only be made using PowerSuite when
it is in this configuration, otherwise operation cannot be guaranteed.
v [Not separ.] (SIM): Reference and command, not separate
v [Separate] (SEP): Separate reference and command This assignment cannot be accessed in
[I/O profile] (IO).
v [I/O profile] (IO): I/O profile
When [8 serie] (SE8) is selected and [I/O profile] (IO) is deselected, the drive automatically returns to the factory
setting (this is mandatory). This factory setting only affects the [1 DRIVE MENU] menu. It does not affect either
[1.9 COMMUNICATION] or [1.14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD].
- With the graphic display terminal, a screen appears to perform this operation. Follow the instructions on
the screen.
- With the integrated display terminal, press ENT and hold it down (for 2 s). This will save the selection and
return to the factory setting.

109
CCS M [Cmd switching] [ch1 active] (Cd1)
Cd1
Cd2
LI1
-
-
-
The parameter can be accessed if [Profile] (CHCF) = [Separate] (SEP) or [I/O profile] (IO)
v [ch1 active] (Cd1): [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) active (no switching)
v [ch2 active] (Cd2): [Cmd channel 2] (Cd2) active (no switching)
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 107 (not CDOO to CD14).
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, channel [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) is active.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, channel [Cmd channel 2] (Cd2) is active.
Cd1 M [Cmd channel 1] [Terminals] (tEr)
tEr
LCC
Mdb
CAn
nEt
APP
v [Terminals] (tEr): Terminals
The parameter is available if [Profile] (CHCF) = [Separate] (SEP) or [I/O profile] (IO).
Cd2 M [Cmd channel 2] [Modbus] (Mdb)
tEr
LCC
Mdb
CAn
nEt
APP
v [Terminals] (tEr): Terminals
The parameter is available if [Profile] (CHCF) = [Separate] (SEP) or [I/O profile] (IO).
rFC M [Ref. 2 switching] [ch1 active] (Fr1)
Fr1
Fr2
LI1
-
-
-
v [ch1 active] (Fr1): No switching, [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) active
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, channel [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) is active.
If the assigned bit or input is at 1, channel [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) is active.
Fr2 M [Ref.2 channel] [No] (nO)
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
UPdt
LCC
Mdb
CAn
nEt
APP
PI
PG
v [No] (nO): Not assigned If [Profile] (CHCF) = [Not separ.] (SIM), command is at the terminals with
a zero reference. If [Profile] (CHCF) = [Separate] (SEP) or [I/O profile] (IO), the reference is zero.
v [+/- Speed] (UPdt): +/-Speed command

110
COP M [Copy channel 1 <> 2] [No] (nO)
nO
SP
Cd
ALL
Can be used to copy the current reference and/or the command by means of switching, in order to avoid
speed surges, for example.
If [Profile] (CHCF) page 108 = [Not separ.] (SIM) or [Separate] (SEP), copying will only be possible from
channel 1 to channel 2.
If [Profile] (CHCF) = [I/O profile] (IO), copying will be possible in both directions.
v [No] (nO): No copy
v [Reference] (SP): Copy reference
v [Command] (Cd): Copy command
v [Cmd + ref.] (ALL): Copy command and reference
- A reference or a command cannot be copied to a channel on the terminals.
- The reference copied is FrH (before ramp) unless the destination channel reference is set via +/- speed.
In this case, the reference copied is rFr (after ramp).
WARNING
Copying the command and/or reference can change the direction of rotation.
Check that this is safe.

111
As the graphic display terminal may be selected as the command and/or reference channel, its action modes can be configured.
The parameters on this page can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal, and not on the integrated display terminal.
Notes:
• The display terminal command/reference is only active if the command and/or reference channels from the terminal are active,
with the exception of [T/K] (command and reference via the display terminal), which takes priority over these channels. Press [T/K]
again to revert control to the selected channel.
• Command and reference via the display terminal are impossible if the latter is connected to more than one drive.
• The JOG, preset speed and +/- speed functions can only be accessed if [Profile] (CHCF) = [Not separ.] (SIM).
• The preset PID reference functions can only be accessed if [Profile] (CHCF) = [Not separ.] (SIM) or [Separate] (SEP).
• The [T/K] function (command and reference via the display terminal) can be accessed regardless of the [Profile] (CHCF).
Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting
M [F1 key assignment] [No]
v [No]: Not assigned
v [Jog]: JOG operation
v [Preset spd2]: Press the key to run the drive at the 2nd
preset speed [Preset speed 2] (SP2) page 130. Press STOP to
stop the drive.
v [Preset spd3]: Press the key to run the drive at the 3rd
preset speed [Preset speed 3] (SP3) page 130. Press STOP to stop
the drive.
v [PID ref. 2]: Sets a PID reference equal to the 2nd
preset PID reference [Preset ref. PID 2] (rP2) page 146 without sending
a run command. Only operates if [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) = [HMI] (LCC). Does not operate with the [T/K] function.
v [PID ref. 3]: Sets a PID reference equal to the 3rd
preset PID reference [Preset ref. PID 3] (rP3) page 146 without sending
a run command. Only operates if [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) = [HMI] (LCC). Does not operate with the [T/K] function.
v [+Speed]: Faster, only operates if [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) = [HMI] (LCC). Press the key to run the drive and increase the speed.
Press STOP to stop the drive.
v [-Speed]: Slower, only operates if [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) = [HMI] (LCC) and if a different key is assigned to [+Speed].
Press the key to run the drive and decrease the speed. Press STOP to stop the drive.
v [T/K]: Command and reference via the display terminal: Takes priority over [Cmd switching] (CCS) and over
[Ref. 2 switching] (rFC).
Identical to [F1 key assignment].
M [F4 key assignment] [T/K]
M [HMI cmd.] [Bumpless]
When the [T/K] function is assigned to a key and that function is active, this parameter defines the behavior at the moment when
control returns to the graphic display terminal.
v [Stop]: Stops the drive (although the controlled direction of operation and reference of the previous channel are copied (to be taken
into account on the next RUN command)).
v [Bumpless]: Does not stop the drive (the controlled direction of operation and the reference of the previous channel are copied).

112
With integrated display terminal: Summary of functions:
Code Name Page
rEF- [REFERENCE SWITCH.] 118
OAI- [REF. OPERATIONS] 119
rPt- [RAMP] 120
Stt- [STOP CONFIGURATION] 123
AdC- [AUTO DC INJECTION] 125
JOG- [JOG] 127
PSS- [PRESET SPEEDS] 129
UPd- [+/-Speed] 132
SrE- [+/-SPEED AROUND REF.] 134
SPM- [MEMO REFERENCE] 135
FLI- [FLUXING BY LI] 136
PId- [PID REGULATOR] 141
Pr1- [PID PRESET REFERENCES] 146
SrM- [SLEEPING / WAKE UP] 148
tOL- [TORQUE LIMITATION] 153
CLI- [2nd CURRENT LIMIT.] 154
LLC- [LINE CONTACTOR COMMAND] 156
OCC- [OUTPUT CONTACTOR CMD] 158
MLP- [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] 160
MMC- [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.] 164
tnL- [AUTO TUNING BY LI] 164
nFS- [NO FLOW DETECTION] 166
FLL- [FLOW LIMITATION] 168
dCO- [DC BUS SUPPLY] 169
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
7 DISPLAY CONFIG.
ENT
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
1.6 COMMAND
1.9 COMMUNICATION
1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
1.11 IDENTIFICATION
1.13 USER MENU
ENT
REFERENCE SWITCH.
REF. OPERATIONS
RAMP
STOP CONFIGURATION
AUTO DC INJECTION
Code << >> T/K
XXX
CtL-
FUn-
SIM-
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ENT
ESC
LAC-
FLt-
ESC
APPLICATION FUNCT.
Power-up

113
The parameters in the [1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and there is no run
command, except for parameters with a symbol in the code column, which can be modified with the drive running or stopped.
Note: Compatibility of functions
The choice of application functions may be limited by the number of I/O and by the fact that some functions are incompatible with
one another. Functions that are not listed in the table below are fully compatible.
If there is an incompatibility between functions, the first function configured will prevent the others being configured.
Each of the functions on the following pages can be assigned to one of the inputs or outputs.
A single input can activate several functions at the same time (reverse and 2nd
ramp, for example). The user must therefore ensure
that these functions can be used at the same time. It is only possible to assign one input to several functions at [Advanced] (AdU) and
[Expert] (EPr) level.
Before assigning a command, reference or function to an input or output, the user must make sure that this input or output has
not already been assigned and that another input or output has not been assigned to an incompatible or undesirable function.
The drive factory setting or macro configurations automatically configure functions, which may prevent other functions being assigned.
It may be necessary to unconfigure one or more functions in order to be able to enable another. Check the compatibility table below.

114
Compatibility table
(1)Priority is given to the first of these two stop modes to be activated.
(2)Excluding special application with reference channel Fr2 (see diagrams on pages 101 and 102).
(3)Only the multiplier reference is incompatible with the PID regulator.
Stop functions have priority over run commands.
Speed references via logic command have priority over analog references.
Note: This compatibility table does not affect commands that can be assigned to the keys of the graphic display terminal
(see page 111).
Ref.operations(page119)
+/-speed(2)(page132)
Presetspeeds(page129)
PIDregulator(page141)
JOGoperation(page127)
DCinjectionstop(page123)
Faststop(page123)
Freewheelstop(page123)
+/-speedaroundareference(page134)
Synchronousmotor(page63)
Ref. operations (page 119) A p(3) A
+/- speed (2) (page 132) p
Preset speeds (page 129) X A
PID regulator (page 141) p(3) p p
JOG operation (page 127) X p X p p
DC injection stop (page 123) p(1) A p
Fast stop (page 123) p(1) A
Freewheel stop (page 123) X X
+/- speed around a reference (page 134) p p
Synchronous motor (page 63) p
Incompatible functions Compatible functions N/A
The function marked with the arrow takes priority over the other.
Priority functions (functions, which cannot be active at the same time):

115
Incompatible functions
The following functions will be inaccessible or deactivated in the cases described below:
Automatic restart
This is only possible for control type [2/3 wire control] (tCC) = [2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd priority] (PFO).
See page 76.
Catch on the fly
This is only possible for control type [2/3 wire control] (tCC) = [2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd priority] (PFO).
See page 76.
This function is locked if automatic injection on stop [Auto DC injection] (AdC) = [Continuous] (Ct). See page 125.
The SUP- monitoring menu (page 35) can be used to display the functions assigned to each input in order to check their compatibility.
When a function is assigned, a appears on the graphic display terminal, as illustrated in the example below:
If you attempt to assign a function that is incompatible with another function that has
already been assigned, an alarm message will appear:
With the graphic display terminal
With the integrated display terminal:
COMP flashes until ENT or ESC is pressed.
When you assign a logic input, an analog input, a reference channel or a bit to
a function, pressing the HELP button will display the functions that may already
have been activated by this input, bit or channel.
REFERENCE SWITCH.
REF. OPERATIONS
RAMP
STOP CONFIGURATION
AUTO DC INJECTION
Code << >> T/K
JOG
INCOMPATIBILITY
The function can't be assigned
because an incompatible
function is already selected. See
programming book.
ENT or ESC to continue

116
When a logic input, an analog input, a reference channel or a bit that has already
been assigned is assigned to another function, the following screens appear:
With the graphic display terminal
If the access level permits this new assignment, pressing ENT confirms the assignment.
If the access level does not permit this new assignment, pressing ENT results in the following display.
The code for the first function, which is already assigned, is displayed flashing.
If the access level permits this new assignment, pressing ENT confirms the assignment.
If the access level does not permit this new assignment, pressing ENT has no effect, and the message continues to flash. It is only possible
to exit by pressing ESC.
RUN +50.00 Hz 1250A +50.00 Hz
WARNING - ASSIGNED TO
Reference switch. 2
ENT->Continue ESC->Cancel
RUN +50.00 Hz 1250A +50.00 Hz
ASSIGNMENT FORBIDDEN
Un-assign the present
functions, or select
Advanced access level

117
Summing input/Subtracting input/Multiplier
A = (Fr1 or Fr1b + SA2 + SA3 - dA2 - dA3) x MA2 x MA3
• If SA2, SA3, dA2, dA3 are not assigned, they are set to 0.
• If MA2, MA3 are not assigned, they are set to 1.
• A is limited by the minimum LSP and maximum HSP parameters.
• For multiplication, the signal on MA2 or MA3 is interpreted as a %; 100% corresponds to the maximum value of the corresponding
input. If MA2 or MA3 is sent via the communication bus or graphic display terminal, an MFr multiplication variable
(see page 41) must be sent via the bus or graphic display terminal.
• Reversal of the direction of operation in the event of a negative result can be inhibited (see page 108).
Fr1 or Fr1b
SA2
SA3
dA2
dA3
MA2
MA3
A

118
rEF- b [REFERENCE SWITCH.]
rCb M [Ref 1B switching]
See the diagrams on pages 101 and 102.
[LI3] (LI3)
Fr1
Fr1b
LI1
-
-
-
v [ch1B active] (Fr1b): No switching, [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) active
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
• If the assigned input or bit is at 0, [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) is active (see page 108).
• If the assigned input or bit is at 1, [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) is active.
[Ref 1B switching] (rCb) is forced to [ch1 active] (Fr1) if [Profile] (CHCF) = [Not separ.] (SIM) with
[Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) assigned via the terminals (analog inputs, encoder, pulse input); see page 108.
Fr1b M [Ref.1B channel] [AI2] (AI2)
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
LCC
Mdb
CAn
nEt
APP
PI
PG
Note:
In the following instances, only assignments via the terminals are possible:
- [Profile] (CHCF) = [Not separ.] (SIM) with [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) assigned via the terminals
(analog inputs, encoder, pulse input); see page 108.
- PID configured with PID references via the terminals

119
OAI- b [REF. OPERATIONS]
Reference = (Fr1 or Fr1b + SA2 + SA3 - dA2 - dA3) x MA2 x MA3. See the diagrams on pages 101 and 102.
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 113.
SA2 M [Summing ref. 2] [No] (nO)
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
LCC
Mdb
CAn
nEt
APP
PI
PG
Selection of a reference to be added to [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).
v [No] (nO): No source assigned
SA3 M [Summing ref. 3] [No] (nO)
Selection of a reference to be added to [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).
• Possible assignments are identical to [Summing ref. 2] (SA2) above.
dA2 M [Subtract. ref. 2] [No] (nO)
Selection of a reference to be subtracted from [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).
dA3 M [Subtract. ref. 3] [No] (nO)
Selection of a reference to be subtracted from [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).
MA2 M [Multiplier ref. 2] [No] (nO)
Selection of a multiplier reference [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).
MA3 M [Multiplier ref. 3] [No] (nO)
Selection of a multiplier reference [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).

120
rPt- b [RAMP]
rPt M [Ramp type] [Linear] (LIn)
LIn
S
U
CUS
v [Linear] (LIn)
v [S ramp] (S)
v [U ramp] (U)
v [Customized] (CUS)
S ramps
The rounding coefficient is fixed,
where t2 = 0.6 x t1
and t1 = set ramp time.
The rounding coefficient is fixed,
where t2 = 0.5 x t1
and t1 = set ramp time.
tA1: adjustable from 0 to 100%
tA2: adjustable from 0 to (100% – tA1)
tA3: adjustable from 0 to 100%
tA4: adjustable from 0 to (100% – tA3)
As a % of t1, where t1 = set ramp time
Inr M [Ramp increment] (1) [0.1] (0.1)
0.01
0.1
1
v [1]: Ramp up to 9,000 seconds
This parameter is valid for [Acceleration] (ACC), [Deceleration] (dEC), [Acceleration 2] (AC2) and
[Deceleration 2] (dE2).
ACC M [Acceleration] (1) 0.01 to 9,000 s (2) 3.0 s
dEC M [Deceleration] (1) 0.01 to 9,000 s (2) 3.0 s
FrS
t
0
t2
t1
f (Hz)
FrS
t
0
t2
t1
f (Hz)
FrS
t
0
tA1 tA2 tA3 tA4
t1
f (Hz)
FrS
t
0
t1
f (Hz)
FrS
t
0
t2
t1
f (Hz)
FrS
t
0
t2
t1
f (Hz)
U ramps
Customized ramps

121
b [RAMP] (continued)
tA1 M [Begin Acc round] (1) 0 to 100% 10%
- Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2)
ramp time.
- Can be set between 0 and 100%
- The parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] (rPt) is [Customized] (CUS).
tA2 M [End Acc round] (1) 10%
- Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2)
ramp time.
- Can be set between 0 and (100% – [Begin Acc round] (tA1))
tA3 M [Begin Dec round] (1) 0 to 100% 10%
- Rounding of start of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2)
ramp time.
- Can be set between 0 and 100%
tA4 M [End Dec round] (1) 10%
- Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2)
ramp time.
- Can be set between 0 and (100% – [Begin Dec round] (tA3))

122
(2)Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 9,000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr) page 120.
b [RAMP] (continued)
Frt M [Ramp 2 threshold] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0 Hz
Ramp switching threshold
The 2nd ramp is switched if the value of Frt is not 0 (0 deactivates the function) and the output frequency
is greater than Frt.
Threshold ramp switching can be combined with [Ramp switch ass.] (rPS) switching as follows:
rPS M [Ramp switch ass.] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [No] (nO): Not assigned.
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 107.
- ACC and dEC are enabled when the assigned input or bit is at 0.
- AC2 and dE2 are enabled when the assigned input or bit is at 1.
AC2 M [Acceleration 2] (1) 0.01 to 9,000 s (2) 5.0 s
The parameter can be accessed if [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt) > 0 or if [Ramp switch ass.] (rPS) is assigned.
dE2 M [Deceleration 2] (1) 0.01 to 9,000 s (2) 5.0 s
Time to decelerate from [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) to 0. Make sure that this value is compatible with the
The parameter can be accessed if [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt) > 0 or if [Ramp switch ass.] (rPS) is assigned.
brA M [Dec ramp adapt.] [Yes] (YES)
nO
YES
dYnA
dYnb
dYnC
Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp, if this has been set at too low a value
for the inertia of the load.
v [Yes] (YES): Function active, for applications that do not require strong deceleration.
The following selections appear depending on the rating of the drive and in accordance with [Motor control
type] (Ctt) page 63. They enable stronger deceleration to be obtained than with [Yes] (YES).
v [High torq. A] (dYnA)
v [High torq. B] (dYnb)
v [High torq. C] (dYnC)
[Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) is forced to [No] (nO) if [Braking balance] (bbA) page 74 = [Yes] (YES).
The function is incompatible with applications requiring:
- Positioning on a ramp
- The use of a braking resistor (the resistor would not operate correctly)
LI or bit Frequency Ramp
0 <Frt ACC, dEC
0 >Frt AC2, dE2
1 <Frt AC2, dE2
1 >Frt AC2, dE2

123
Stt- b [STOP CONFIGURATION]
Note: Some types of stop cannot be used with all other functions. Follow the instructions on
page 113.
Stt M [Type of stop] [Ramp stop] (rMP)
rMP
FSt
nSt
dCI
Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command.
v [Ramp stop] (rMP): On ramp
v [Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
v [Freewheel] (nSt): Freewheel stop This selection will not appear if [Motor fluxing] (FLU) page 136 =
[Continuous] (FCt).
v [DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop
If the [Low speed time out] (tLS) parameter page 52 or 148 is not 0, [Type of stop] (Stt) is forced to
[Ramp stop] (rMP).
nSt M [Freewheel stop ass.] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
C101
-
-
-
Cd00
-
v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
The stop is activated when the input or bit is at 0. If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is
still active, the motor will only restart if [2/3 wire control] (tCC) page 76 = [2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire type]
(tCt) = [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd priority] (PFO). If not, a new run command must be sent.
FSt M [Fast stop assign.] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on
page 113.
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
The stop is activated when the input changes to 0 or the bit changes to 1(bit in [I/O profile] (IO) at 0).
If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if [2/3 wire
control] (tCC) page 76 = [2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd priority] (PFO).
If not, a new run command must be sent.
dCF M [Ramp divider] (1) 0 to 10 4
The parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) = [Fast stop] (FSt) and if [Fast stop assign.] (FSt)
is not [No] (nO).
The ramp that is enabled (dEC or dE2) is then divided by this coefficient when stop requests are sent.
Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time.

124
(3)Warning: These settings are independent of the [AUTO DC INJECTION] (AdC-) function.
b [STOP CONFIGURATION] (continued)
dCI M [DC injection assign.] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
DC injection braking is initiated when the assigned input or bit changes to state 1.
If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if [2/3 wire control]
(tCC) page 76 = [2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd priority] (PFO). If not, a new run
command must be sent.
IdC M [DC inject. level 1] (1) (3) 0.1 to 1.1 or 1.2 In (2)
according to rating
0.64 In (2)
The parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) = [DC injection] (dCI) or if [DC injection assign.] (dCI)
is not [No] (nO).
tdI M [DC injection time 1] (1) (3) 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
is not [No] (nO).
IdC2 M [DC inject. level 2] (1) (3) 0.1 In (2) to [DC inject.
level 1] (IdC)
0.5 In (2)
has elapsed.
is not [No] (nO).
tdC M [DC injection time 2] (1) (3) 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
Maximum injection time [DC inject. level 2] (IdC2) for injection, selected as stop mode only.
The parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) = [DC injection] (dCI).
CAUTION
CAUTION

125
AdC- b [AUTO DC INJECTION]
AdC M [Auto DC injection]
Automatic current injection on stopping (at the end of the ramp)
[Yes] (YES)
nO
YES
Ct
v [No] (nO): No injection
v [Yes] (YES): Adjustable injection time
v [Continuous] (Ct): Continuous standstill injection
Warning: There is an interlock between this function and [Motor fluxing] (FLU) page 136. If [Motor fluxing]
(FLU) = [Continuous] (FCt), [Auto DC injection] (Adc) must be [No] (nO).
Note: This parameter gives rise to the injection of current even if a run command has not been sent.
It can be accessed with the drive running.
SdC1 M [Auto DC inj. level 1] (1) 0 to 1.1 or 1.2 In (2)
according to rating
0.7 In (2)
Level of standstill DC injection current. The parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not
[No] (nO). This parameter is forced to 0 if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 63 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
tdC1 M [Auto DC inj. time 1] (1) 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
Standstill injection time. The parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not [No] (nO).
If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 63 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn) this time corresponds to the zero speed
maintenance time.
SdC2 M [Auto DC inj. level 2] (1) 0 to 1.1 or 1.2 In (2)
according to rating
0.5 In (2)
2nd level of standstill DC injection current.
The parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not [No] (nO).
This parameter is forced to 0 if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 63 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
CAUTION
CAUTION

126
b [AUTO DC INJECTION] (continued)
tdC2 M [Auto DC inj. time 2] (1) 0 to 30 s 0 s
2nd
standstill injection time. The parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) = [Yes] (YES.)
AdC SdC2 Operation
YES x
Ct ≠ 0
Ct
= 0
Run command
Speed
t
SdC1
SdC2
tdC1 tdC1 + tdC2
I
t
SdC1
I
t
SdC1
SdC2
tdC1
I
t
0
t
1
0

127
JOG- b [JOG]
JOG M [JOG] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
C101
-
-
-
Cd00
-
Pulse operation.
The JOG function is only active if the command channel and the reference channels are on the
terminals.
Selecting the assigned logic input or bit activates the function.
v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
v [C101] (C101) to [C115] (C115): With integrated Modbus in [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
v [C201] (C201) to [C215] (C215): With integrated CANopen in [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
v [C301] (C301) to [C315] (C315): With a communication card in [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
v [C401] (C401) to [C415] (C415): With a Controller Inside card in [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
v [CD00] (Cd00) to [CD13] (Cd13): In [I/O profile] (IO) configuration can be switched with possible logic inputs
v [CD14] (Cd14) to [CD15] (Cd15): In [I/O profile] (IO) configuration can be switched without logic inputs
The function is active when the assigned input or bit is at 1.
Example: 2-wire control operation (tCC = 2C)
JGF M [Jog frequency] (1) 0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz
The parameter can be accessed if [JOG] (JOG) is not [No] (nO) or if a function key has been assigned to
JOG (see page 111).
Reference in jog operation
JGt M [Jog delay] (1) 0 to 2.0 s 0.5 s
The parameter can be accessed if [JOG] (JOG) is not [No] (nO) or if a function key has been assigned to
JOG (see page 111).
Anti-repeat delay between 2 consecutive jog operations.
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
Ramp
forced to 0.1 s
Reference
JGF reference
JGF reference
LI (JOG)
Forward
Reverse
Ramp
DEC/DE2
Motor
frequency
JGt

128
Preset speeds
2, 4 or 8 speeds can be preset, requiring 1, 2 or 3 logic inputs respectively.
You must configure 2 and 4 speeds in order to obtain 4 speeds.
You must configure 2, 4 and 8 speeds in order to obtain 8 speeds.
Combination table for preset speed inputs
(1)See the diagram on page 101: Reference 1 = (SP1).
8 speeds
LI (PS8)
4 speeds
LI (PS4)
2 speeds
LI (PS2)
Speed reference
0 0 0 Reference (1)
0 0 1 SP2
0 1 0 SP3
0 1 1 SP4
1 0 0 SP5
1 0 1 SP6
1 1 0 SP7
1 1 1 SP8
Note:

129
PSS- b [PRESET SPEEDS]
PS2 M [2 preset speeds] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
To obtain 4 speeds you must also configure 2 speeds.
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
To obtain 8 speeds you must also configure 2 and 4 speeds.

130
b [PRESET SPEEDS] (continued)
The appearance of these [Preset speed x] (SPx) parameters is determined by the number of speeds
configured.
SP2 M [Preset speed 2] (1) 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
10 Hz
SP3 M [Preset speed 3] (1) 15 Hz
SP8 M [Preset speed 8]
The factory setting changes to 60 Hz if [Standard
mot. freq] (bFr) = [60Hz NEMA] (60).
(1) 50 Hz

131
+/- speed
Two types of operation are available.
1. Use of single-press buttons: Two logic inputs are required in addition to the operating direction(s).
The input assigned to the “+ speed” command increases the speed, the input assigned to the “- speed” command decreases the speed.
2. Use of double-press buttons: Only one logic input assigned to “+ speed” is required.
+/- speed with double-press buttons:
Description: 1 button pressed twice (2 steps) for each direction of rotation. A contact closes each time the button is pressed.
Example of wiring:
LI1: forward
LIx: reverse
LIy: + speed
Do not use this +/-speed type with 3-wire control.
Whichever type of operation is selected, the max. speed is set by [High speed] (HSP) (see page 34).
Note:
If the reference is switched via rFC (see page 109) from any one reference channel to another reference channel with “+/- speed”, the value
of reference rFr (after ramp) may be copied at the same time in accordance with the [Copy channel 1 --> 2] (COP) parameter, see page 110.
If the reference is switched via rFC (see page 109) from one reference channel to any other reference channel with “+/- speed”, the value
of reference rFr (after ramp) is always copied at the same time.
This prevents the speed being incorrectly reset to zero when switching takes place.
Released (- speed) 1st press
(speed maintained)
2nd press
(faster)
Forward button – a a and b
Reverse button – c c and d
ATV 61 control
terminals
LI1 LIx LIy +24
a
b
c
d
a a a a a a a
b b
c c
d
c
Motor frequency
LSP
Forward
0
2st
press
1st press
Reverse
0
2st
press
1st press
0
LSP

132
UPd- b [+/-Speed]
Function can be accessed if reference channel [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) = [+/-Speed] (UPdt) see page 109.
USP M [+ speed assignment] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
C101
-
-
-
Cd00
-
v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1.
dSP M [-Speed assignment] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
C101
-
-
-
Cd00
-
v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
Str M [Reference saved] [No] (nO)
nO
rAM
EEP
Associated with the “+/- speed” function, this parameter can be used to save the reference:
• When the run commands disappear (saved to RAM)
• When the line supply or the run commands disappear (saved to EEPROM)
Therefore, the next time the drive starts up, the speed reference is the last reference saved.
v [No] (nO): No save (the next time the drive starts up, the speed reference is [Low speed] (LSP),
see page 34)
v [RAM] (rAM): Save to RAM
v [EEprom] (EEP): Save to EEPROM

133
+/- speed around a reference
The reference is given by Fr1 or Fr1b with summing/subtraction/multiplication functions and preset speeds if relevant (see the diagram on
page 101). For improved clarity, we will call this reference A. The action of the +speed and -speed buttons can be set as a % of this reference
A. On stopping, the reference (A +/- speed) is not saved, so the drive restarts with reference A only.
The maximum total reference is always limited by [High speed] (HSP) and the minimum reference by [Low speed] (LSP), see page 34.
Example of 2-wire control:
+ SrP%
Reference A
-speed
Direction of operation
ForwardForward
Reverse
+speed
- SrP%
- SrP%
+ SrP%
Reference A
LSP
LSP
Motor frequency
[Acceleration 2] (AC2)
[Deceleration 2] (dE2)

134
SrE- b [+/-SPEED AROUND REF.]
The function can be accessed for reference channel [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1).
USI M [+ speed assignment] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
dSI M [-Speed assignment] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
SrP M [+/-Speed limitation] 0 to 50% 10%
This parameter limits the variation range with +/- speed as a % of the reference. The ramps used in this
function are [Acceleration 2] (AC2) and [Deceleration 2] (dE2).
The parameter can be accessed if +/- speed is assigned.
AC2 M [Acceleration 2] (1) 0.01 to 9,000 s (2) 5.0 s
The parameter can be accessed if +/- speed is assigned.
dE2 M [Deceleration 2] (1) 0.01 to 9,000 s (2) 5.0 s
inertia being driven. The parameter can be accessed if +/- speed is assigned.

135
Reference saving:
Saving a speed reference value using a logic input command lasting longer than 0.1 s.
• This function is used to control the speed of several drives alternately via a single analog reference and one logic input for each drive.
• It is also used to confirm a line reference (communication bus or network) on several drives via a logic input. This allows movements
to be synchronized by getting rid of variations when the reference is sent.
• The reference is acquired 100 ms after the rising edge of the request. A new reference is not then acquired until a new request is
made.
SPM- b [MEMO REFERENCE]
SPM M [Ref. memo ass.] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
LI14
v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
Assignment to a logic input.
Function active if the assigned input is at 1.
t
t
t
0
0
1
0
1
100 ms 100 ms100 ms
F: motor frequency
reference
Run command
LIx (saved)

136
FLI- b [FLUXING BY LI]
FLU M [Motor fluxing] (1) [No] (FnO)
FnC
FCt
FnO
v [Not cont.] (FnC): Non-continuous mode
v [Continuous] (FCt): Continuous mode. This option is not possible if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) page 125
is [Yes] (YES) or if [Type of stop] (Stt) page 123 is [Freewheel] (nSt).
v [No] (FnO): Function inactive
At and above 55 kW for ATV61pppM3X and at and above 90 kW for ATV61pppN4, if [Motor control type]
(Ctt) page 63 = [SVC V] (UUC) or [Energy Sav.] (nLd), this selection cannot be made and the factory setting
is replaced by [Not cont.] (FnC).
If [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [Sync. mot.] (SYn) the factory setting is replaced by [Not cont.] (FnC).
In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup, magnetic flux needs to already have been established in
the motor.
• In [Continuous] (FCt) mode, the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up.
• In [Not cont.] (FnC) mode, fluxing occurs when the motor starts up.
The flux current is greater than nCr (configured rated motor current) when the flux is established and is then
adjusted to the motor magnetizing current...
If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 63 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn), the [Motor fluxing] (FLU) parameter causes the
alignment of the motor and not the fluxing.
FLI M [Fluxing assignment] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
Assignment is only possible if [Motor fluxing] (FLU) is not [Continuous] (FCt).
• In [Not cont.] (FnC) mode:
- If an LI or a bit is assigned to the motor fluxing command, flux is built up when the assigned input or bit
is at 1.
- If an LI or a bit has not been assigned, or if the LI or bit assigned is at 0 when a run command is sent,
fluxing occurs when the motor starts.
• In [No] (FnO) mode:
- If an LI or a bit is assigned to the motor fluxing command, flux is built up when the assigned input or bit
is at 1 and is suppressed when the assigned input or bit is at 0.
CAUTION

137
PID regulator
Block diagram
The function is activated by assigning an analog input to the PID feedback (measurement).
PID feedback:
The PID feedback must be assigned to one of the analog inputs AI1 to AI4, to the frequency input or the encoder, according to whether any
extension cards have been inserted.
PID reference:
The PID reference must be assigned to the following parameters:
• Preset references via logic inputs (rP2, rP3, rP4)
• In accordance with the configuration of [Act. internal PID ref.] (PII) pages 141:
- Internal reference (rPI) or
- Reference A (Fr1 or Fr1b, see page 102)
Combination table for preset PID references
A predictive speed reference can be used to initialize the speed on restarting the process.
How the various ramps work:
• ACC and dEC are only active in the event of changes in the predictive reference and not on starting PID regulation.
• AC2 affects the PID output on starting PID regulation and on PID "wake-ups" only.
• PrP is only active in the event of changes in the PID reference.
LI (Pr4) LI (Pr2) Pr2 = nO reference
rPI or A
0 0 rPI or A
0 1 rP2
1 0 rP3
1 1 rP4
PAU
Pr2
Pr4
nO
+
-
rP2
rP3
rP4
rIG
rPG
PIF
PIN
0
tLS
rSL
UPP
PIF1 / PIF2
PIP1 / PIP2
x(-1)
nO
nO
YES
PIC
nO
AI1
.....
AI4
LI
+
+
POH
POL
rdG
ACC DEC
FPI x PSr
PII
SP2
SP16
rPI
A BnO
YES
PrP
AC2
Internal
reference
Reference A
Pages 102
and 103
PID feedback
Preset PID references
Error
inversion
Restart error or
feedback threshold
(wake-up)
Gains
Ramps
Parameter:
The black rectangle
represents the factory
setting assignment.
Key:
Ramp
Preset manual references
Scaling
RP
Encoder
Network AI
Predictive
speed
reference
Manual reference
Auto/
Manual
Pages
102 and
103
Ramp

138
Scaling of feedback and references:
• PIF1, PIF2 parameters
Can be used to scale the PID feedback (sensor range).
This scale MUST be maintained for all other parameters.
• PIP1, PIP2 parameters
Can be used to scale the adjustment range, i.e., the reference. The adjustment range MUST be within the sensor range.
The scaling parameters must not exceed a value of 32767. To simplify setup, we recommend that you use values as close as possible
to this maximum limit but remain within powers of 10 in respect of the actual values.
Example (see the graph below): Adjustment of the volume in a tank, between 6 m3 and 15 m3.
- Sensor used 4-20 mA, 4.5 m3 for 4 mA, 20 m3 for 20 mA, with the result that PIF1 = 4500 and PIF2 = 20000.
- Adjustment range 6 to 15 m3, with the result that PIP1 = 6000 (min. reference) and PIP2 = 15000 (max. reference).
- Example references:
- rP1 (internal reference) = 9,500
- rp2 (preset reference) = 6,500
- rP3 (preset reference) = 8,000
- rP4 (preset reference) = 11,200
The [DISPLAY CONFIG.] menu can be used to customize the name of the unit displayed and its format.
Other parameters:
• rSL parameter:
Can be used to set the PID error threshold, above which the PID regulator will be reactivated (wake-up) after a stop due to the max.
time threshold being exceeded at low speed (tLS).
• Reversal of the direction of correction (PIC): If PIC = nO, the speed of the motor will increase when the error is positive, for example:
pressure control with a compressor. If PIC = YES, the speed of the motor will decrease when the error is positive, for example:
temperature control using a cooling fan.
• UPP parameter:
If PIC = nO, can be used to set the PID feedback threshold, above which the PID regulator will be reactivated (wake-up) after a stop
due to the max. time threshold being exceeded at low speed (tLS).
If PIC = YES, can be used to set the PID feedback threshold, below which the PID regulator will be reactivated (wake-up) after a stop
due to the max. time threshold being exceeded at low speed (tLS).
• The integral gain may be short-circuited by a logic input.
• An alarm on the PID feedback may be configured and indicated by a logic output.
• An alarm on the PID error may be configured and indicated by a logic output.
PID feedback
Adjustment range
(reference)
PIP2 (15000)
PIP1 (6000)
PIF1
(4500)
PIF2
(20000)

139
“Manual – Automatic” operation with PID
This function combines the PID regulator, the preset speeds and a manual reference. Depending on the state of the logic input, the speed
reference is given by the preset speeds or by a manual reference input via the PID function.
Manual reference (PIM)
• Analog inputs AI1 to AI4
• Frequency input
• Encoder
Predictive speed reference (FPI)
• [AI1] (AI1): Analog input
• [AI2] (AI2): Analog input
• [AI3] (AI3): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
• [AI4] (AI4): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
• [RP] (PI): Frequency input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
• [Encoder] (PG): Encoder input, if encoder card has been inserted
• [HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal
• [Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
• [CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen
• [Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
• [Prog. card] (APP): Controller Inside card (if inserted)
Setting up the PID regulator
1. Configuration in PID mode
See the diagram on page 137.
2. Perform a test in factory settings mode (in most cases, this will be sufficient).
To optimize the drive, adjust rPG or rIG gradually and independently and observe the effect on the PID feedback in relation to the
reference.
3. If the factory settings are unstable or the reference is incorrect
• Perform a test with a speed reference in Manual mode (without PID regulator) and with the drive on load for the speed range of the
system:
- In steady state, the speed must be stable and comply with the reference and the PID feedback signal must be stable.
- In transient state, the speed must follow the ramp and stabilize quickly, and the PID feedback must follow the speed.
If this is not the case, see the settings for the drive and/or sensor signal and wiring.
• Switch to PID mode.
• Set brA to no (no auto-adaptation of the ramp).
• Set the PID ramp (PrP) to the minimum permitted by the mechanism without triggering an ObF fault.
• Set the integral gain (rIG) to minimum.
• Leave the derivative gain (rdG) at 0.
• Observe the PID feedback and the reference.
• Switch the drive ON/OFF a number of times or vary the load or reference rapidly a number of times.
• Set the proportional gain (rPG) in order to ascertain the best compromise between response time and stability in transient phases
(slight overshoot and 1 to 2 oscillations before stabilizing).
• If the reference varies from the preset value in steady state, gradually increase the integral gain (rIG), reduce the proportional gain
(rPG) in the event of instability (pump applications), find a compromise between response time and static precision (see diagram).
• Lastly, the derivative gain may permit the overshoot to be reduced and the response time to be improved, although this will make
it more difficult to obtain a compromise in terms of stability, as it depends on 3 gains.
• Perform in-production tests over the whole reference range.

140
The oscillation frequency depends on the system kinematics.
Parameter Rise time Overshoot Stabilization time Static error
rPG =
rIG
rdG = =
Regulated
value
Proportional
gain
rPG high
Overshoot
Stabilization time
rPG low
Static error
Rise time
time
Integral
gain
rIG high
rIG low
rdG increased
time
time
Reference
Reference
Reference
rPG and rIG correct

141
thousand digit, e.g., 15.65 for 15,650.
PId- b [PID REGULATOR]
PIF M [PID feedback ass.] [No] (nO)
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
PI
PG
AIU1
v [No] (nO): Not assigned (function inactive) In this case, none of the function parameters can be accessed.
v [Network AI] (AIU1): Feedback via communication bus
AICI M [AI net. channel] [No] (nO)
nO
Mdb
CAn
nEt
APP
The parameter can be accessed if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) = [Network AI] (AIU1).
PIF1 M [Min PID feedback] (1) 100
Value for minimum feedback. Adjustment range from 0 to [Max PID feedback] (PIF2) - 1 (2).
PIF2 M [Max PID feedback] (1) 1,000
Value for maximum feedback Adjustment range from [Min PID feedback] (PIF1) + 1 to 32,767 (2).
PIP1 M [Min PID reference] (1) 150
Minimum process value. Adjustment range between [Min PID feedback] (PIF1) and [Max PID feedback]
(PIP2) - 1 (2).
PIP2 M [Max PID reference] (1) 900
Maximum process value Adjustment range between [Min PID reference] (PIP1) + 1 to [Max PID reference]
(PIF2) (2).
PII M [Act. internal PID ref.] [No] (nO)
nO
YES
Internal PID regulator reference
v [No] (nO): The PID regulator reference is given by Fr1 or Fr1b with summing/subtraction/multiplication
functions (see the diagram on page 101).
v [Yes] (YES): The PID regulator reference is internal via parameter rPI.
rPI M [Internal PID ref.] 150
Internal PID regulator reference This parameter can also be accessed in the [1.2 MONITORING]
(SUP-) menu.
Adjustment range between [Min PID reference] (PIP1) and [Max PID reference] (PIP2) (2).
rPG M [PID prop. gain] 0.01 to 100 1
Proportional gain

142
b [PID REGULATOR] (continued)
rIG M [PID integral gain] 0.01 to 100 1
Integral gain
rdG M [PID derivative gain] 0.00 to 100 0
Derivative gain
PrP M [PID ramp] (1) 0 to 99.9 s 0 s
PID acceleration/deceleration ramp, defined to go from [Min PID reference] (PIP1) to [Max PID reference]
(PIP2) and vice versa.
PIC M [PID correct. reverse] [No] (nO)
nO
YES
v [No] (nO)
v [Yes] (YES)
Reversal of the direction of correction (PIC):
If PIC = nO, the speed of the motor will increase when the error is positive. Example: pressure control with
a compressor.
If PIC = YES, the speed of the motor will decrease when the error is positive. Example: temperature control
using a cooling fan.
POL M [Min PID output] (1) - 500 to 500 or -1,000
to 1,000 Hz according
to rating
0 Hz
Minimum value of regulator output in Hz
POH M [Max PID output] (1) 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
60 Hz
Maximum value of regulator output in Hz
PAL M [Min fbk alarm] (1) 100
Minimum regulator feedback monitoring threshold (alarm can be assigned to a relay or a logic output,
page 89).
Adjustment range from [Min PID feedback] (PIF1) to [Max PID feedback] (PIF2) (2).
PAH M [Max fbk alarm] (1) 1,000
Maximum regulator feedback monitoring threshold (alarm can be assigned to a relay or a logic output,
page 89).
Adjustment range from [Min PID feedback] (PIF1) to [Max PID feedback] (PIF2) (2).
PEr M [PID error Alarm] (1) 0 to 65,535 (2) 100
Regulator error monitoring threshold.
PIS M [PID integral reset] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the function is inactive (the PID integral is enabled).
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the function is active (the PID integral is disabled).

143
(2)Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 9000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr) page 120.
FPI M [Speed ref. assign.] [No] (nO)
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
LCC
Mdb
CAn
nEt
APP
PI
PG
PID regulator predictive speed input
v [No] (nO): Not assigned (function inactive)
PSr M [Speed input%] (1) 1 to 100% 100%
Multiplying coefficient for predictive speed input.
The parameter cannot be accessed if [Speed ref. assign.] (FPI) = [No] (nO).
PAU M [Auto/Manual assign.] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [No] (nO): The PID is always active.
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the PID is active.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, manual operation is active.
AC2 M [Acceleration 2] (1) 0.01 to 9000 s (2) 5.0 s
Ramp AC2 is only active when the PID function is starting up and in the event of PID "wake-ups".
PIM M [Manual reference] [No] (nO)
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
PI
PG
Manual speed input. The parameter can be accessed if [Auto/Manual assign.] (PAU) is not [No] (nO).
The preset speeds are active on the manual reference if they have been configured.

144
PID feedback supervision
Used to define the operating mode in the event of detection of a PI feedback:
• Lower than the limit set if [PID correct. reverse] (PIC) = [No] (nO)
• Higher than the limit set if [PID correct. reverse] (PIC) = [Yes] (YES)
Where [PID correct. reverse] (PIC) = [No] (nO)
If, once maximum speed has been reached ([High speed] (HSP)), the PID feedback is lower than the supervision threshold [PID Threshold]
(LPI) -2%, a time delay tPI is launched. If at the end of this time delay the value of the PID feedback is still lower than the supervision
threshold [PID Threshold] (LPI) + 2%, the drive switches to fallback mode as defined by parameter MPI.
In all cases the drive reverts to PID regulation mode as soon as the PID feedback exceeds the supervision threshold [PID Threshold]
(LPI) +2%.
Where [PID correct. reverse] (PIC) = [Yes] (YES)
If, once maximum speed has been reached ([High speed] (HSP)), the PID feedback is higher than the supervision threshold [PID Threshold]
(LPI) +2%, a time delay tPI is launched. If at the end of this time delay the value of the PID feedback is still higher than the supervision
threshold [PID Threshold] (LPI) -2%, the drive switches to fallback mode as defined by parameter MPI.
In all cases the drive reverts to PID regulation mode as soon as the PID feedback undershoots the supervision threshold [PID Threshold]
(LPI) -2%.
LPI + 2 %
LPI
LPI - 2 %
HSP
LFF
MPI = LFF
MPI = FSt
< tPI tPI0
0
Fallback mode
defined by MPI
Time delay stopping
PID feedback
Motor frequency
LPI + 2 %
LPI
LPI - 2 %
HSP
LFF
MPI = LFF
MPI = FSt
< tPI tPI0
0
Fallback mode
defined by MPI
Time delay stopping
PID feedback
Motor frequency

145
LPI M [PID Threshold] (1) 100
nO
-
PID regulator feedback supervision threshold (alarm can be assigned to a relay or a logic output, page 89).
Adjustment range:
v [No] (nO): Function inactive (it will not be possible to access the other function parameters)
v between [Min PID feedback] (PIF1) and [Max PID feedback] (PIF2) (2).
tPI M [PID Ctrl. time delay] (1) 0 to 600 s 0 s
PID regulator feedback supervision time delay
MPI M [PID Control Mngmt] [Ignore] (nO)
nO
YES
LFF
rMP
FSt
Type of stop for PID regulator feedback supervision fault.
v [Ignore] (nO): Fault ignored
v [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop.
v [fallback spd] (LFF): Switch to fallback speed, maintained as long as the fault is present and the run
command is not disabled.
v [Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp
LFF M [Fallback speed] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0 Hz
Fallback speed for PID regulator feedback supervision fault.

146
Pr1- b [PID PRESET REFERENCES]
Function can be accessed if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is assigned.
Pr2 M [2 preset PID ref.] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the function is inactive.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the function is active.
Pr4 M [4 preset PID ref.] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
Make sure that [2 preset PID ref.] (Pr2) has been assigned before assigning this function.
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
rP2 M [Preset ref. PID 2] (1) 300
The parameter can be accessed if [2 preset PID ref.] (Pr2) has been assigned.
The parameter can be accessed if [2 preset PID ref.] (Pr2) and [4 preset PID ref.] (Pr4) have been assigned.
The parameter can be accessed if [2 preset PID ref.] (Pr2) and [4 preset PID ref.] (Pr4) have been assigned.

147
Sleep/Wake-up
This function supplements the PID regulator, in order to avoid prolonged operation at excessively low speeds when neither useful nor
desirable.
• It stops the motor after a period of operation at reduced speed. This time and speed can be adjusted.
• It restarts the motor if the PID error or feedback exceeds an adjustable threshold.
Sleep:
Following operation at a speed less than
[Low speed] (LSP) + [Sleep Offset Thres.] (SLE) for
a period of time greater than or equal to [Low speed
time out] (tLS), the motor is stopped on a ramp.
Wake-up:
If the PID error exceeds [PID wake up thresh.] (rSL)
(see the example opposite) or if the PID feedback
exceeds [PID Wakeup Thres.] (UPP), the PID
regulator is reactivated.
tLS0
0
LSP
LSP + SLE
rSL
Frequency
PID error
Sleep
Wake-up
Time
Time

148
SrM- b [SLEEPING / WAKE UP]
tLS M [Low speed time out] (1) 0 to 999.9 s 0 s
Maximum operating time at [Low speed] (LSP).
Following operation at LSP for a defined period, a motor stop is requested automatically. The motor restarts
if the reference exceeds (LSP + SLE) and if a run command is still present.
Caution: Value 0 corresponds to an unlimited period.
LSP M [Low speed] (1) 0 Hz
Motor frequency at minimum reference, can be set between 0 and [High speed] (HSP) (see page 46).
SLE M [Sleep Offset Thres.] (1) 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
1 Hz
Adjustable restart threshold (offset) following a stop after prolonged operation at [Low speed] (LSP), in Hz.
The motor restarts if the reference rises above (LSP + SLE) and if a run command is still present.
rSL M [PID wake up thresh.] 0
If the “PID” and “Low speed operating time” tLS functions are configured at the same time, the PID regulator
may attempt to set a speed lower than LSP.
This results in unsatisfactory operation, which consists of starting, operating at low speed then stopping,
and so on…
Parameter rSL (restart error threshold) can be used to set a minimum PID error threshold for restarting after
a stop at prolonged LSP.
The function is inactive if the PID function has not been configured or if tLS = 0 or if rSL = 0.
Adjustment range from 0.0 to [Max PID feedback] (PIF2) (2).
UPP M [PID Wakeup Thres.] [No] (nO)
If the “PID” and “Low speed operating time” tLS functions are configured at the same time, the PID regulator
may attempt to set a speed lower than LSP.
This results in unsatisfactory operation, which consists of starting, operating at low speed then stopping,
and so on…
Parameter UPP (restart feedback threshold) can be used to set a PID feedback threshold for restarting after
a stop due to prolonged LSP. This threshold is minimum if [PID correct. reverse] (PIC) = [No] (nO) and
maximum if [PID correct. reverse] (PIC) = [Yes] (YES)
The function is inactive if the PID function has not been configured or if tLS = 0 or if UPP = [No] (nO) or if
rSL is active (not 0).
Adjustment range: [No] (nO) or between [Min PID feedback] (PIF1) and [Max PID feedback] (PIF2) (2).
WARNING
Check that unintended restarts will not present any danger.
WARNING
Check that unintended restarts will not present any danger.

149
Sleeping on the basis of flow detection
Parameters can be accessed in [Expert] mode.
This function is only active when the motor frequency is less than [NoFlo.Freq.Thres.Ac.] (FFd).
This function is used in applications where zero flow cannot be detected by the sleep function alone. At periodic intervals (based on
time [No Flow Period Det.] (nFd)), it forces the drive’s frequency reference to [Low speed] (LSP) + [No Flow Offset] (LFd) in order to test
for zero flow.
Set the sleep function so that the drive switches to sleep mode when zero flow is detected ([No Flow Offset] (LFd) y [Sleep Offset
Thres.] (SLE) page 148).
The test can be carried out at underpressure or overpressure as appropriate for the type of installation.
Test at underpressure: (LSP + LFd) < FFd
• If the request is still present, the PID regulator error increases (at underpressure), causing the drive to restart at its previous speed
above the sleep threshold.
.
• If the request is no longer present (zero flow), the PID regulator error will not increase, and the speed will remain below the sleep
threshold, thereby inducing a stop.
.
PI feedback
Frequency
FFd
LSP + LFd
nFd
LSP t
t
nFd
PID error
LSP + SLE
PID feedback
Frequency
LSP
LSP + LFd
nFd tLS
FFd
Sleep threshold LSP + SLE
t
t

150
Test at overpressure: (LSP + LFd) > FFd
• If the request is still present, the PID regulator error increases (at overpressure), causing the drive to decelerate. If flow is detected,
the speed will stabilize at its previous level, above the sleep threshold.
.
• If the request is no longer present (zero flow), the PID regulator error increases (at overpressure), causing the drive to decelerate.
The absence of flow maintains the overpressure and the speed falls below the sleep threshold, causing the drive to stop.
.
PI feedback
Frequency
FFd
LSP + LFd
nFd
LSP t
t
nFd
PID error
LSP + SLE
PID feedback
Frequency
LSP
LSP + LFd
nFd tLS
FFd
Sleep threshold LSP + SLE
t
t

151
Parameters can be accessed in [Expert] mode.
b [SLEEPING / WAKE UP] (continued)
nFd M [No Flow Period Det.] 0 to 20 min 0 min
Zero flow detection interval, in minutes.
The parameter can be accessed if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not [No] (nO).
FFd M [NoFlo.Freq.Thres.Ac.] (1) 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0 Hz
Zero flow detection activation threshold
(nFd) is not 0.
LFd M [No Flow Offset] (1) 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0 Hz
Zero flow detection offset
(nFd) is not 0.

152
Torque limitation
There are two types of torque limitation:
• With a value that is fixed by a parameter
• With a value that is set by an analog input (AI, pulse or encoder)
If both types are enabled, the lowest value is taken into account. The two types of limitation can be configured or switched remotely using
a logic input or via the communication bus.
[Yes]
(YES)
LI
[Motoringtorquelim]
(tLIM)
[Gen. torque lim]
(tLIG)
Torque
limitation via
parameter
[Torque limit. activ.] (tLA)
[No]
(nO)
[LI]
[Yes]
(YES)
LI
[AI.] (AI.)
[RP] (PI)
[Encoder] (PG)
Torque
limitation via
analog input,
RP or
Encoder
[Analog limit. act.] (tLC)
[No]
(nO)
[LI]
Lowest value
taken into account
Limitation
value
[Torque ref. assign.] (tAA)
[AI]

153
tOL- b [TORQUE LIMITATION]
This function cannot be accessed in V/F profile mode.
tLA M [Torque limit. activ.] [No] (nO)
nO
YES
LI1
-
-
-
v [Yes] (YES): Function always active
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
tLIM M [Motoring torque lim] (1) 0 to 300% 100%
The parameter cannot be accessed if [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) = [No] (nO)
Torque limitation in motor mode, as a % of the rated torque.
tLIG M [Gen. torque lim] (1) 0 to 300% 100%
The parameter cannot be accessed if [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) = [No] (nO)
Torque limitation in generator mode, as a % of the rated torque.
tAA M [Torque ref. assign.] [No] (nO)
nO
AI1
-
AI4
PI
PG
v [AI1] (AI1)
to
[AI4] (AI4): Analog input, if VW3A3202 I/O card has been inserted
v [RP] (PI): Frequency input, if VW3A3202 I/O card has been inserted
If the function is assigned, the limitation varies between 0% and 300% of the rated torque on the basis of
the 0% to 100% signal applied to the assigned input.
Examples:
- 12 mA on a 4-20 mA input results in limitation to 150% of the rated torque.
- 2.5 V on a 10 V input results in 75% of the rated torque.
tLC M [Analog limit. act.] [Yes] (YES)
YES
LI1
-
-
-
The parameter can be accessed if [Torque ref. assign.] (tAA) is not [No] (nO).
v [Yes] (YES): The limitation depends on the input assigned by [Torque ref. assign.] (tAA).
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
If the assigned input or bit is at 0:
• The limit is specified by the [Motoring torque lim] (tLIM) and [Gen. torque lim] (tLIG) parameters if
[Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) is not [No] (nO).
• No limitation if [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) = [No] (nO).
If the assigned input or bit is at 1:
• The limitation depends on the input assigned by [Torque ref. assign.] (tAA).
Note: If [Torque limitation] (tLA) and [Torque ref. assign.] (tAA) are enabled at the same time, the lowest
value will be taken into account.

154
CLI- b [2nd CURRENT LIMIT.]
LC2 M [Current limit 2] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [No] (nO): Function inactive.
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the first current limitation is active.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the second current limitation is active.
CL2 M [I Limit. 2 value] (1) 0 to 1.1 or 1.2 In (2)
according to rating
1.1 or 1.2 In (2)
according to rating
Second current limitation The parameter can be accessed if [Current limit 2] (LC2) is not [No] (nO).
CLI M [Current Limitation] (1) 0 to 1.1 or 1.2 In (2)
according to rating
1.1 or 1.2 In (2)
according to rating
First current limitation

155
Line contactor command
Example circuit:
Note: The “Run/Reset” button must be pressed once the
“Emergency stop” button has been released.
The drive control power supply must be provided via an external 24 V source.
Note: The line contactor closes every time a run command (forward or reverse) is sent and opens after every stop.
U V W
L1 L2 L3
P24 LIn LO/Rp0 LIp
0 V 24 V
ATV 71
M
3
KM1
K11
K10K11
K11
K10
3 a
line
Emergency
stop
Run/Reset
24 V power supply
Forward
or
reverse
CAUTION
This function can only be used for a small number of consecutive operations with a cycle time longer than 60 s (in order
to avoid premature aging of the filter capacitor charging circuit).

156
LLC- b [LINE CONTACTOR COMMAND]
LLC M [Line contactor ass.] [No] (nO)
nO
LO1
-
LO4
r2
-
r4
Logic output or control relay
v [No] (nO): Function not assigned (in this case, none of the function parameters can be accessed).
v [LO1] (LO1)
to
[LO4] (LO4): Logic output (if one or two I/O cards have been inserted, LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected).
v [R2] (r2)
to
[R4] (r4): Relay (selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I/O cards have been inserted).
LES M [Drive lock] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
The drive locks when the assigned input or bit changes to 0.
LCt M [Mains V. time out] 5 to 999 s 5 s
Monitoring time for closing of line contactor. If, once this time has elapsed, there is no voltage on the drive
power circuit, the drive will lock with an [input contactor] (LCF) fault.

157
Output contactor command
This allows the drive to control a contactor located between the drive and the motor. The request for the contactor to close is made when
a run command is sent. The request for the contactor to open is made when there is no longer any current in the motor.
Output contactor feedback
The corresponding logic input should be at 1 when there is no run command and at 0 during operation.
In the event of an inconsistency, the drive trips on an FCF2 fault if the output contactor fails to close (LIx at 1) and on an FCF1 fault if it
is stuck (LIx at 0).
The parameter [Time to motor run] (dbS) can be used to delay tripping in fault mode when a run command is sent and the parameter
[Time to open cont.] (dAS) delays the fault when a stop command is set.
Note:
Fault FCF2 (contactor failing to close) can be reset by the run command changing state from 1 to 0 (0 --> 1 --> 0 in 3-wire control).
The [Out. contactor ass.] (OCC) and [Output contact. fdbk] (rCA) functions can be used individually or together.
CAUTION
If a DC injection braking function has been configured it should not be left operating too long in stop mode, as the contactor only
opens at the end of braking.
U
KM2
M
3
KM2
K20 KM2
K20
V W 0 LOp/Rp P24 LIp
Command FeedbackATV 61

158
OCC- b [OUTPUT CONTACTOR CMD]
OCC M [Out. contactor ass.] [No] (nO)
nO
LO1
-
LO4
r2
-
r4
v [No] (nO): Function not assigned (in this case, none of the function parameters can be accessed).
v [LO1] (LO1)
to
v [R2] (r2)
to
rCA M [Output contact. fdbk] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
The motor starts up when the assigned input or bit changes to 0.
dbS M [Time to motor run] 0.05 to 60 s 0.15
Time delay for:
• Motor control following the sending of a run command
• Output contactor fault monitoring, if the feedback is assigned. If the contactor fails to close at the end of
the set time, the drive will lock in FCF2 fault mode.
This parameter can be accessed if [Output cont.] (OCC) is assigned or if [Output contact. fdbk] (rCA) is
assigned.
The time delay must be greater than the closing time of the output contactor.
dAS M [Time to open cont.] 0 to 5.00 s 0.10
Time delay for output contactor opening command following motor stop.
This parameter can be accessed if [Output contact. fdbk] (rCA) is assigned.
The time delay must be greater than the opening time of the output contactor. If it is set to 0, the fault will
not be monitored.
If the contactor fails to open at the end of the set time, the drive will lock in FCF1 fault mode.

159
Parameter set switching [PARAM. SET SWITCHING]
A set of 1 to 15 parameters from the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu on page 44 can be selected and 2 or 3 different values assigned. These
2 or 3 sets of values can then be switched using 1 or 2 logic inputs or control word bits. This switching can be performed during operation
(motor running).
Note: Do not modify the parameters in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu, because any modifications made in this menu will be lost
on the next power-up. The parameters can be adjusted during operation in the [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] (MLP-) menu, on the
active configuration.
Note: Parameter set switching cannot be configured from the integrated display terminal.
Parameters can only be adjusted on the integrated display terminal if the function has been configured previously via the graphic display
terminal, by PowerSuite or via the bus or communication network. If the function has not been configured, the MLP- menu and the PS1-,
PS2-, PS3- submenus do not appear.
Values 1 Values 2 Values 3
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Parameter 4
Parameter 5
Parameter 6
Parameter 7
Parameter 8
Parameter 9
Parameter 10
Parameter 11
Parameter 12
Parameter 13
Parameter 14
Parameter 15
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Parameter 4
Parameter 5
Parameter 6
Parameter 7
Parameter 8
Parameter 9
Parameter 10
Parameter 11
Parameter 12
Parameter 13
Parameter 14
Parameter 15
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Parameter 4
Parameter 5
Parameter 6
Parameter 7
Parameter 8
Parameter 9
Parameter 10
Parameter 11
Parameter 12
Parameter 13
Parameter 14
Parameter 15
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Parameter 4
Parameter 5
Parameter 6
Parameter 7
Parameter 8
Parameter 9
Parameter 10
Parameter 11
Parameter 12
Parameter 13
Parameter 14
Parameter 15
Input LI or bit
2 values
0 1 0 or 1
Input LI or bit
3 values
0 0 1

160
MLP- b [PARAM. SET SWITCHING]
CHA1 M [2 Parameter sets] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
Switching 2 parameter sets
CHA2 M [3 Parameter sets] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
Switching 3 parameter sets
Note: In order to obtain 3 parameter sets, [2 Parameter sets] must also be configured.
M [PARAMETER SELECTION]
The parameter can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal if [2 Parameter sets] is not [No].
Making an entry in this parameter opens a window containing all the adjustment parameters that can be
accessed.
Select 1 to 15 parameters using ENT (a tick then appears next to the parameter). Parameter(s) can also be
deselected using ENT.
Example:
PS1- M [SET 1]
The parameter can be accessed if one or more parameters have been selected in [PARAMETER
SELECTION].
Making an entry in this parameter opens a settings window containing the selected parameters in the order
in which they were selected.
With the graphic display terminal:
Proceed as in the Settings menu using the parameters that appear.
PARAMETER SELECTION
1.3 SETTINGS
Ramp increment
- - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - -
SET1
Acceleration : 9.51 s
Deceleration : 9.67 s
Acceleration 2 : 12.58 s
Deceleration 2 : 13.45 s
Begin Acc round : 2.3 s
Code T/K
ENT
Acceleration
9.51 s
Min = 0.1 Max = 999.9
<< >> T/K

161
Note: We recommend that a parameter set switching test is carried out on stopping and a check is made to ensure
that it has been performed correctly.
Some parameters are interdependent and in this case may be restricted at the time of switching.
Interdependencies between parameters must be respected, even between different sets.
Example: The highest [Low speed] (LSP) must be below the lowest [High speed] (HSP).
b [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] (continued)
PS2- M [SET 2]
The parameter can be accessed if one or more parameters have been selected in [PARAMETER
SELECTION].
Procedure identical to [SET 1] (PS1-).
PS3- M [SET 3]
The parameter can be accessed if [3 parameter sets] is not [No] and if one or more parameters have been
selected in [PARAMETER SELECTION].
Procedure identical to [SET 1] (PS1-).

162
Motor or configuration switching [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.]
The drive may contain up to 3 configurations, which can be saved using the [1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-) menu, page 199.
Each of these configurations can be activated remotely, enabling adaptation to:
• 2 or 3 different motors or mechanisms (multimotor mode)
• 2 or 3 different configurations for a single motor (multiconfiguration mode)
The two switching modes cannot be combined.
Note: The following conditions MUST be observed:
• Switching may only take place when stopped (drive locked). If a switching request is sent during operation, it will not be executed
until the next stop.
• In the event of motor switching, the following additional conditions apply:
- When the motors are switched, the power and control terminals concerned must also be switched as appropriate.
- The maximum power of the drive must not be exceeded by any of the motors.
• All the configurations to be switched must be set and saved in advance in the same hardware configuration, this being the
definitive configuration (option and communication cards). Failure to follow this instruction can cause the drive to lock on
an [Incorrect config.] (CFF) fault.
Menu and parameters switched in multimotor mode
• [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-)
• [1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)
• [1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)
• [1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-)
• [1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) with the exception of the [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.] function (to be configured once only)
• [1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt)
• [1.13 USER MENU]
• [USER CONFIG.]: The name of the configuration specified by the user in the [1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-) menu
Menu and parameters switched in multiconfiguration mode
As in multimotor mode, except for the motor parameters that are common to the three configurations:
- Rated current
- Thermal current
- Rated voltage
- Rated frequency
- Rated speed
- Rated power
- Magnetizing current at zero frequency
- IR compensation
- Slip compensation
- Synchronous motor parameters
- Type of thermal protection
- Thermal state
- The auto-tuning parameters and motor parameters that can be accessed in expert mode
- Type of motor control
Note: No other menus or parameters can be switched.

163
Switching command
Depending on the number of motors or selected configuration (2 or 3), the switching command is sent using one or two logic inputs.
The table below lists the possible combinations.
Schematic diagram for multimotor mode
Auto-tuning in multimotor mode
This auto-tuning can be performed:
• Manually using a logic input when the motor changes
• Automatically each time the motor is activated for the 1st time after switching on the drive, if the [Automatic autotune] (AUt) parameter
on page 62 = [Yes] (YES).
Motor thermal states in multimotor mode:
The drive protects the three motors individually. Each thermal state takes into account all stop times, including drive shutdowns.
It is therefore not necessary to perform auto-tuning every time the power is switched on. It is sufficient to auto-tune each motor at least once.
Configuration information output
In the [1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-) menu, a logic output can be assigned to each configuration or motor (2 or 3) for remote
information transmission.
Note: As the [1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-) menu is switched, these outputs must be assigned in all configurations in which
information is required.
LI
2 motors or configurations
LI
3 motors or configurations
Number of configuration
or active motor
0 0 0
1 0 1
0 1 2
1 1 2
LI
ATV 71
+ 24 V
LI
Configuration 0
if the 2 contacts
are open.
Configuration 1
Configuration 2
Configuration 0 LO or R
Configuration 1
LO or R
Configuration 2
LO or R
M0 M1 M2

164
MMC- b [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.]
CHM M [Multimotors] [No] (nO)
nO
YES
v [No] (nO): Multiconfiguration possible
v [Yes] (YES): Multimotor possible
CnF1 M [2 Configurations] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
C111
-
-
-
v [No] (nO): No switching.
v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
v [C111] (C111) to [C115] (C115): With integrated Modbus
v [C211] (C211) to [C215] (C215): With integrated CANopen
v [C311] (C311) to [C315] (C315): With a communication card
v [C411] (C411) to [C415] (C415): With a Controller Inside card
Switching of 2 motors or 2 configurations
CnF2 M [3 Configurations] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
C111
-
-
-
v [No] (nO): No switching
v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
v [C111] (C111) to [C115] (C115): With integrated Modbus
v [C211] (C211) to [C215] (C215): With integrated CANopen
v [C311] (C311) to [C315] (C315): With a communication card
v [C411] (C411) to [C415] (C415): With a Controller Inside card
Switching of 3 motors or 3 configurations
Note: In order to obtain 3 motors or 3 configurations, [2 Configurations] (CnF1) must also be configured.
tnL- b [AUTO TUNING BY LI]
tUL M [Auto-tune assign.] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
Auto-tuning is performed when the assigned input or bit changes to 1.
Note: Auto-tuning causes the motor to start up.

165
Zero fluid or zero flow detection via sensor
In the case of a pump, for example, this function can be used to avoid operation when there is no fluid or if the conduits are blocked.
Although this function is independent of the “Sleeping on the basis of flow detection” function on page 149, the two can be used in tandem.
The function uses a fluid sensor assigned to a logic input.
The fault is triggered if the frequency exceeds an adjustable threshold [Freq.Th.Sensor. Act.] (nFFt) and the input assigned to the sensor
is at zero. The fault is ignored on startup for an adjustable time delay [Flow Times Ctrl] (nFSt) in order to avoid untimely triggering due to
a transient state.
This fault triggers a freewheel stop.
Run command
Flow sensor
0 = zero flow
LSP
HSP
Frequency
Test zone for
zero flow
nFSt
nFFt
Zero flow (freewheel stop)

166
nFS- b [NO FLOW DETECTION]
nFS M [No Flow Sensor] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
C101
-
-
-
Cd00
-
Assignment of the zero fluid sensor.
v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
If the assigned input is at 0, this indicates that there is no fluid present.
nFFt M [Freq.Th.Sensor. Act.] (1) 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0 Hz
Zero fluid detection activation threshold
nFSt M [Flow Times Ctrl] (1) 0 to 999 s 10 s
Zero fluid detection activation time delay

167
Flow limitation
This function can be used to limit the flow of a fluid, in the case of a pump, for example.
The function uses a flow sensor assigned to an analog input, the “pulse in” input or the encoder input. It limits the frequency reference. In the
case of regulation with PID, it affects the PID regulator output reference.
• Before A – The signal on the input assigned to the flow measurement has not reached the activation threshold [Flow.Lim.Th.Active]
(CHt): Flow limitation is not activated and the input reference is applied.
• A – The signal on the input assigned to the flow measurement has reached the threshold [Flow.Lim.Th.Active] (CHt): Flow limitation
is activated, the reference is limited to [Low speed] (LSP) and the frequency decelerates along the ramp [Dec. Flow. limit] (dFL).
• B – The signal on the input assigned to the flow measurement has fallen below the hysteresis of the threshold [Flow.Lim.Th.Active]
(CHt): The current frequency is copied and applied as the reference.
• C – The input reference has fallen below the reference B and is continuing to fall: It is applied.
• D – The input reference starts to rise again: The current frequency is copied and applied as the reference.
• E – The signal on the input assigned to the flow measurement has reached the threshold [Flow.Lim.Th.Active] (CHt): The reference
is limited to [Low speed] (LSP) and the frequency decelerates along the ramp [Dec. Flow. limit] (dFL).
• F – The signal on the input assigned to the flow measurement has fallen below the hysteresis of the threshold [Flow.Lim.Th.Active]
(CHt): The current frequency is copied and applied as the reference.
• After F – The signal on the input assigned to the flow measurement has fallen below the deactivation threshold [Flo.Lim.Thres. Inact.]
(rCHt): Flow limitation is no longer active and the input reference is applied.
CHt
rCHt
LSP
A B ED FC
0
0
0
dFL
dFL
Flow input
Hysteresis for CHt
Hysteresis
Flow limitation active
Frequency reference
Frequency
Ramp
Ramp

168
FLL- b [FLOW LIMITATION]
CHI M [Flow.Sen.Inf] [No] (nO)
nO
AI1
-
AI4
PI
PG
v [AI1] (AI1)
to
[AI4] (AI4): Analog input, if VW3A3202 I/O card has been inserted
v [RP] (PI): Frequency input, if VW3A3202 I/O card has been inserted
CHt M [Flow.Lim.Th.Active] (1) 0 to 100% 0%
Function activation threshold, as a % of the max. signal of the assigned input
rCHt M [Flo.Lim.Thres. Inact.] (1) 0 to 100% 0%
Function deactivation threshold, as a % of the max. signal of the assigned input
dFL M [Dec. Flow. limit] (1) 0.01 to 9,000 s (2) 5.0 s

169
Direct power supply via DC bus
This function is only accessible for ATV61HpppM3 u 18.5 kW (25 HP), ATV61HpppN4 > 18.5 kW (25 HP) and ATV61WpppN4 > 22 kW
(30 HP) drives.
Direct power supply via the DC bus requires a protected direct current source with adequate power and voltage as well as a suitably
dimensioned resistor and capacitor precharging contactor. Consult Schneider Electric for information about dimensioning these
components.
The “direct power supply via DC bus” function can be used to control the precharging contactor via a relay or a logic input on the drive.
Example circuit using R2 relay:
dCO- b [DC BUS SUPPLY]
This function is only accessible for ATV61pppM3 u 18.5 kW (25 HP) and ATV61pppN4 > 18.5 kW (25 HP)
drives.
dCO M [Precharge cont. ass.] [No] (nO)
nO
LO1
-
LO4
r2
-
r4
v [No] (nO): Function not assigned.
v [LO1] (LO1)
to
v [R2] (r2)
to
ATV71ppp
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
M
3 a
A1
R2A
R2C
- KM1
A2
A1
U1
W1
V1
P0
PA/+
PC/-
- +
DC power
supply
Contactor power
supply

170
[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)
With integrated display terminal: Summary of functions:
Code Name Page
PtC- [PTC MANAGEMENT] 172
rSt- [FAULT RESET] 172
Atr- [AUTOMATIC RESTART] 173
FLr- [CATCH ON THE FLY] 174
tHt- [MOTOR THERMAL PROT.] 176
OPL- [OUTPUT PHASE LOSS] 176
IPL- [INPUT PHASE LOSS] 177
OHL- [DRIVE OVERHEAT] 177
SAt- [THERMAL ALARM STOP] 178
EtF- [EXTERNAL FAULT] 179
USb- [UNDERVOLTAGE MGT] 180
tIt- [IGBT TESTS] 181
LFL- [4-20mA LOSS] 182
InH- [FAULT INHIBITION] 183
CLL- [COM. FAULT MANAGEMENT] 184
tId- [TORQUE OR I LIM. DETECT.] 185
brP- [DB RES. PROTECTION] 186
tnF- [AUTO TUNING FAULT] 186
PPI- [CARDS PAIRING] 187
ULd- [PROCESS UNDERLOAD] 189
OLd- [PROCESS OVERLOAD] 190
LFF- [FALLBACK SPEED] 191
FSt- [RAMP DIVIDER] 191
dCI- [DC INJECTION] 191
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
ENT
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
1.6 COMMAND
1.9 COMMUNICATION
1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
1.11 IDENTIFICATION
1.13 USER MENU
ENT
PTC MANAGEMENT
FAULT RESET
AUTOMATIC RESTART
CATCH ON THE FLY
MOTOR THERMAL PROT.
Code << >> T/K
XXX
FUn-
SIM-
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
LAC-
CON-
FLt-
ESC
ESC
ENT
ESC
FAULT MANAGEMENT
Power-up

171
The parameters in the [1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and there is no run
command, except for parameters with a symbol in the code column, which can be modified with the drive running or stopped.
PTC probes
3 sets of PTC probes can be managed by the drive in order to protect the motors:
• 1 on logic input LI6 converted for this use by switch “SW2” on the control card.
• 1 on each of the 2 option cards VW3A3201 and VW3A3202.
Each of these sets of PTC probes is monitored for the following faults:
• Motor overheating
• Sensor break fault
• Sensor short-circuit fault
Protection via PTC probes does not disable protection via I2t calculation performed by the drive (the two types of protection can be
combined).

172
PtC- b [PTC MANAGEMENT]
PtCL M [LI6 = PTC probe] [No] (nO)
nO
AS
rdS
rS
Can be accessed if switch SW2 on the control card is set to PTC.
v [No] (nO): Not used
v [Always] (AS): “PTC probe” faults are monitored permanently, even if the power supply is not connected
(as long as the control remains connected to the power supply).
v [Power ON] (rdS): “PTC probe” faults are monitored while the drive power supply is connected.
v [Motor ON] (rS): “PTC probe” faults are monitored while the motor power supply is connected.
PtC1 M [PTC1 probe] [No] (nO)
nO
AS
rdS
rS
Can be accessed if a VW3A3201 option card has been inserted.
PtC2 M [PTC2 probe] [No] (nO)
nO
AS
rdS
rS
Can be accessed if a VW3A3202 option card has been inserted.
rSt- b [FAULT RESET]
rSF M [Fault reset] [LI4] (LI4)
nO
LI1
-
-
C101
-
-
-
Cd00
-
Manual fault reset
v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
Faults are reset when the assigned input or bit changes to 1, if the cause of the fault has disappeared.
The STOP/RESET button on the graphic display terminal performs the same function.
See pages 218 to 221 for the list of faults that can be reset manually.

173
Atr- b [AUTOMATIC RESTART]
Atr M [Automatic restart] [No] (nO)
nO
YES
v [Yes] (YES): Automatic restart, after locking on a fault, if the fault has disappeared and the other
operating conditions permit the restart. The restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts
separated by increasingly longer waiting periods: 1 s, 5 s, 10 s, then 1 mn for the following attempts.
The drive fault relay remains activated if this function is active. The speed reference and the operating
direction must be maintained.
Use 2-wire control ([2/3 wire control] (tCC) = [2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL)
see page 76).
If the restart has not taken place once the configurable time tAr has elapsed, the procedure is aborted and
the drive remains locked until it is turned off and then on again.
The faults which permit this function are listed on page 220:
tAr M [Max. restart time] [5 minutes] (5)
5
10
30
1h
2h
3h
Ct
v [5 minutes] (5): 5 minutes
v [1 hour] (1h): 1 hour
v [2 hours] (2h): 2 hours
v [3 hours] (3h): 3 hours
v [Unlimited] (Ct): Unlimited
Max. duration of restart attempts. This parameter appears if [Automatic restart] (Atr) = [Yes] (YES).
It can be used to limit the number of consecutive restarts on a recurrent fault.
WARNING
Check that an automatic restart will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way.

174
FLr- b [CATCH ON THE FLY]
FLr M [Catch on the fly] [No] (nO)
nO
YES
Used to enable a smooth restart if the run command is maintained after the following events:
• Loss of line supply or disconnection
• Reset of current fault or automatic restart
• Freewheel stop
The speed given by the drive resumes from the estimated speed of the motor at the time of the restart,
then follows the ramp to the reference speed.
This function requires 2-wire level control.
v [Yes] (YES): Function active
When the function is operational, it activates at each run command, resulting in a slight delay of the current
(0.5 s max.).
[Catch on the fly] (FLr) is forced to [No] (nO) if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) page 125 = [Continuous] (Ct)
UCb M [Sensitivity] 0.4 to 15% 0.6%
The parameter can be accessed at and above 55 kW (75 HP) for the ATV61HpppM3X and at and above
90 kW (120 HP) for the ATV61ppppN4.
Adjusts the catch-on-the-fly sensitivity around the zero speed.
Decrease the value if the drive is not able to perform the catch on the fly, and increase it if the drive locks
on a fault as it performs the catch on the fly.

175
Motor thermal protection
Function:
Thermal protection by calculating the I2
t.
Note: The memory of the motor thermal state is saved when the drive is switched off. The power-off time is used to recalculate the
thermal state the next time the drive is switched on.
• Naturally-cooled motors:
The tripping curves depend on the motor frequency.
• Force-cooled motors:
Only the 50 Hz tripping curve needs to be considered, regardless of the motor frequency.
10 000
1 000
100
0,7 0,8 0,9 1 1,1 1,2 1,3 1,4 1,5 1,6
50 Hz20 Hz10 Hz
1 Hz 3 Hz 5 Hz
Trip time in seconds
Motor current/ItH

176
tHt- b [MOTOR THERMAL PROT.]
tHt M [Motor protect. type] [Self cooled] (ACL)
nO
ACL
FCL
v [No] (nO): No protection.
v [Self cooled] (ACL): For self-cooled motors
v [Force-cool] (FCL): For force-cooled motors
Note: A fault trip will occur when the thermal state reaches 118% of the rated state and reactivation will
occur when the state falls back below 100%.
ttd M [Motor therm. level] (1) 0 to 118% 100%
Trip threshold for motor thermal alarm (logic output or relay)
ttd2 M [Motor2 therm. level] 0 to 118% 100%
Trip threshold for motor 2 thermal alarm (logic output or relay)
Trip threshold for motor 3 thermal alarm (logic output or relay)
OLL M [Overload fault mgt] [Freewheel] (YES)
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
Type of stop in the event of a motor thermal fault
v [Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 123, without fault tripping.
In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears,
according to the restart conditions of the active command channel (e.g., according to [2/3 wire control]
(tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt) page 76 if control is via the terminals). Configuring an alarm for this fault
is recommended (assigned to a logic output, for example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
v [fallback spd] (LFF): Switch to fallback speed, maintained as long as the fault is present and the
run command is not disabled.
v [Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred, as long as
the fault is present and the run command is not disabled.
v [DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions.
See table on page 113.
OPL- b [OUTPUT PHASE LOSS]
OPL M [Output Phase Loss] [Yes] (YES)
nO
YES
OAC
v [Yes] (YES): Tripping on OPF fault with freewheel stop.
v [Output cut] (OAC): No fault triggered, but management of the output voltage in order to avoid an
overcurrent when the link with the motor is re-established and catch on the fly performed (even if this
function has not been configured). This selection cannot be made at and above 55 kW (75 HP) for the
ATV61pppM3X and at and above 90 kW (120 HP) for the ATV61pppN4.
Odt M [OutPh time detect] 0.5 to 10 s 0.5 s
Time delay for taking the [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) fault into account, or for taking management of the
output voltage into account if [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) = [Ouptut cut] (OAC).

177
IPL- b [INPUT PHASE LOSS]
IPL M [Input phase loss] According to drive
rating
nO
YES
v [Ignore] (nO): Fault ignored, to be used when the drive is supplied via a single-phase supply or by
the DC bus.
v [Freewheel] (YES): Fault, with freewheel stop.
If one phase disappears, the drive switches to fault mode [Input phase loss] (IPL), but if 2 or 3 phases
disappear, the drive continues to operate until it trips on an undervoltage fault.
OHL- b [DRIVE OVERHEAT]
OHL M [Overtemp fault mgt] [Freewheel] (YES)
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
Behavior in the event of the drive overheating
(tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt) page 76 if control is via the terminals). Configuring an alarm for this fault is
recommended (assigned to a logic output, for example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
Note: A fault trip will occur when the thermal state reaches 118% of the rated state and reactivation will
occur when the state falls back below 90%.
tHA M [Drv therm. state al] 0 to 118% 100%
Trip threshold for drive thermal alarm (logic output or relay).

178
Deferred stop on thermal alarm
This function can be used in intermittent applications, where it is desirable to avoid any stops for which no command has been given.
It prevents untimely stopping if the drive or motor overheats, by authorizing operation until the next stop for which a command is given.
At the next stop, the drive is locked until the thermal state falls back to a value which undershoots the set threshold by 20%. Example: A trip
threshold set at 80% enables reactivation at 60%.
One thermal state threshold must be defined for the drive, and one thermal state threshold for the motor(s), which will trip the deferred stop.
SAt- b [THERMAL ALARM STOP]
SAt M [Thermal alarm stop] [No] (nO)
nO
YES
v [No] (nO): Function inactive (in this case, the following parameters cannot be accessed)
v [Yes] (YES): Freewheel stop on drive or motor thermal alarm
tHA M [Drv therm. state al] 0 to 118% 100%
Thermal state threshold of the drive tripping the deferred stop.
ttd M [Motor therm. level] 0 to 118% 100%
Thermal state threshold of the motor tripping the deferred stop.
Thermal state threshold of the motor 2 tripping the deferred stop.
Thermal state threshold of the motor 3 tripping the deferred stop.
CAUTION
The drive and motor are no longer protected in the event of thermal alarm stops. This
invalidates the warranty.
Check that the possible consequences do not present any risk.

179
EtF- b [EXTERNAL FAULT]
EtF M [External fault ass.] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
No external fault if the assigned input or bit is at 0.
External fault if the assigned input or bit is at 1.
EPL M [External fault mgt] [Freewheel] (YES)
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
Type of stop in the event of an external fault

180
USb- b [UNDERVOLTAGE MGT]
USb M [UnderV. fault mgt] [Flt&R1open] (0)
0
1
2
Behavior of the drive in the event of an undervoltage
v [Flt&R1open] (0): Fault and fault relay open.
v [Flt&R1close] (1): Fault and fault relay closed.
v [Alarm] (2): Alarm and fault relay remains closed. The alarm may be assigned to a logic output or a relay.
UrES
200
220
240
260
380
400
440
460
480
M [Mains voltage] According to drive
voltage rating
According to drive
voltage rating
Rated voltage of the line supply in V.
For ATV61pppM3:
v [200V ac] (200): 200 Volts AC
v [220V ac] (220): 220 Volts AC
v [240V ac] (240): 240 Volts AC
v [260V ac] (260): 260 Volts AC (factory setting)
For ATV61pppN4:
v [380V ac] (380): 380 Volts AC
v [400V ac] (400): 400 Volts AC
v [440V ac] (440): 440 Volts AC
v [460V ac] (460): 460 Volts AC
v [480V ac] (480): 480 Volts AC (factory setting)
USL M [Undervoltage level]
Undervoltage fault trip level setting in V. The adjustment range and factory setting are determined by the
drive voltage rating and the [Mains voltage] (UrES) value.
USt M [Undervolt. time out] 0.2 s to 999.9 s 0.2 s
Time delay for taking undervoltage fault into account
StP M [UnderV. prevention] [No] (nO)
nO
MMS
rMP
LnF
Behavior in the event of the undervoltage fault prevention level being reached
v [No] (nO): No action
v [DC Maintain] (MMS): This stop mode uses the inertia to maintain the DC bus voltage as long
as possible.
v [Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop following an adjustable ramp [Max stop time] (StM).
v [Lock-out] (LnF): Lock (freewheel stop) without fault
tSM M [UnderV. restart tm] 1.0 s to 999.9 s 1.0 s
Time delay before authorizing the restart after a complete stop for [UnderV. prevention] (StP) = [Ramp stop]
(rMP), if the voltage has returned to normal.
UPL M [Prevention level]
Undervoltage fault prevention level setting in V, which can be accessed if [UnderV. prevention] (StP) is not
[No] (nO). The adjustment range and factory setting are determined by the drive voltage rating and the
[Mains voltage] (UrES) value.
StM M [Max stop time] 0.01 to 60.00 s 1.00 s
Ramp time if [UnderV. prevention] (StP) = [Ramp stop] (rMP).
tbS M [DC bus maintain tm] 1 to 9,999 s 9,999 s
DC bus maintain time if [UnderV. prevention] (StP) = [DC Maintain] (MMS).

181
tIt- b [IGBT TESTS]
Strt M [IGBT test] [No] (nO)
nO
YES
v [No] (nO): No test
v [Yes] (YES): The IGBTs are tested on power up and every time a run command is sent. These tests cause
a slight delay (a few ms). In the event of a fault, the drive will lock. The following faults can be detected:
- Drive output short-circuit (terminals U-V-W): SCF display
- IGBT faulty: xtF, where x indicates the number of the IGBT concerned
- IGBT short-circuited: x2F, where x indicates the number of the IGBT concerned

182
LFL- b [4-20mA LOSS]
LFL2 M [AI2 4-20mA loss] [Ignore] (nO)
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
v [Ignore] (nO): Fault ignored. This configuration is the only one possible if [AI2 min. value] (CrL2) page 82
is not greater than 3 mA or if [AI2 Type] (AI2t) page 82 = [Voltage] (10U).
LFL3 M [AI3 4-20mA loss] Can be accessed if a VW3A3202 option card has been inserted.
[Ignore] (nO)
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
is not greater than 3 mA.
LFL4 M [AI4 4-20mA loss] Can be accessed if a VW3A3202 option card has been inserted.
[Ignore] (nO)
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
is not greater than 3 mA or if [AI4 Type] (AI4t) page 84 = [Voltage] (10U).

183
Parameter can be accessed in [Expert] mode.
InH- b [FAULT INHIBITION]
InH M [Fault inhibit assign.] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
-
-
To assign fault inhibit, press the “ENT” key for 2 s.
v [No] (nO): Function inactive, thereby preventing access to other function parameters.
v [LI1] (LI1)
:
:
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, fault monitoring is active. If the assigned input or bit is at 1, fault monitoring
is inactive. Active faults are reset on a rising edge (change from 0 to 1) of the assigned input or bit.
Note: The “Power Removal” function and any faults that prevent any form of operation are not affected by
this function.
A list of faults affected by this function appears on pages 218 to 222.
InHS
nO
Frd
rrS
M [Forced Run] [No] (nO)
This parameter causes the run command to be forced in a specific direction when the input or bit for
fault inhibition is at 1, with priority over all other commands with the exception of “Power Removal”.
To assign forced run, press and hold down the “ENT” key for 2 s.
v [Fw.For.Run] (Frd): Forced forward run.
v [Rev.For.Run] (rrS): Forced reverse run.
InHr M [Forced Run Ref.] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
50 Hz
The parameter can be accessed if [Forced Run] (InHS) is not [No] (nO)
This parameter causes the reference to be forced to the configured value when the input or bit for
fault inhibition is at 1, with priority over all other references. Value 0 = function inactive.
CAUTION
Inhibiting faults results in the drive not being protected. This invalidates the warranty.
Check that the possible consequences do not present any risk.
DANGER
• Check that it is safe to force the run command.

184
CLL- b [COM. FAULT MANAGEMENT]
CLL M [Network fault mgt] [Freewheel] (YES)
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication fault with a communication card
(tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt) page 76 if control is via the terminals). Configuring an alarm for this fault
is recommended (assigned to a logic output, for example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
COL M [CANopen fault mgt] [Freewheel] (YES)
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication fault with integrated CANopen
SLL M [Modbus fault mgt] [Freewheel] (YES)
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication fault with integrated Modbus
v [Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred, as long as the
fault is present and the run command is not disabled.

185
tId- b [TORQUE OR I LIM. DETECT.]
SSb M [Trq/I limit. Stop] [Ignore] (nO)
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
Behavior in the event of switching to torque or current limitation
v [Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred, as long as the
fault is present and the run command is not disabled.
StO M [Trq/I limit. time out] 0 to 9,999 ms 1,000 ms
(If fault has been configured)
Time delay for taking SSF “Limitation” fault into account

186
brP- b [DB RES. PROTECTION]
brO M [DB res. protection] [No] (nO)
nO
YES
FLt
v [No] (nO): No braking resistor protection (thereby preventing access to the other function parameters).
v [Alarm] (YES): Alarm. The alarm may be assigned to a logic output or a relay (see page 89).
v [Fault] (FLt) : Switch to fault (bOF) with locking of drive (freewheel stop).
Note: The thermal state of the resistor can be displayed on the graphic display terminal.
It is calculated for as long as the drive control remains connected to the power supply.
brP M [DB Resistor Power] 0.1 kW (0.13 HP) to
1,000 kW (1,333 HP)
0.1 kW (0.13 HP)
The parameter can be accessed if [DB res. protection] (brO) is not [No] (nO).
Rated power of the resistor used.
brU M [DB Resistor value] 0.1 to 200 Ohms 0.1 Ohm
The parameter can be accessed if [DB res. protection] (brO) is not [No] (nO).
Rated value of the braking resistor in Ohms.
tnF- b [AUTO TUNING FAULT]
tnL M [Autotune fault mgt] [Freewheel] (YES)
nO
YES
v [Ignore] (nO): Fault ignored.

187
Card pairing
Function can only be accessed in [Expert] mode.
This function is used to detect whenever a card has been replaced or the software has been modified in any way.
When a pairing password is entered, the parameters of the cards currently inserted are stored. On every subsequent power-up these
parameters are verified and in the event of a discrepancy the drive locks in HCF fault mode. Before the drive can be restarted you must
revert to the original situation or re-enter the pairing password.
The following parameters are verified:
• The type of card for: all cards
• The software version for: the two control cards, the VW3A3202 extension card, the Controller Inside card and the communication
cards
• The serial number for: both control cards
PPI- b [CARDS PAIRING]
PPI M [Pairing password] OFF to 9,999 [OFF] (OFF)
The [OFF] (OFF) value signifies that the card pairing function is inactive.
The [ON] (On) value signifies that card pairing is active and that an access code must be entered in order to
start the drive in the event of a card pairing fault.
As soon as the code has been entered the drive is unlocked and the code changes to [ON] (On).
- The PPI code is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support.

188
Process underload fault
A process underload is detected when the next event occurs and remains pending for a minimum time (ULt), which is configurable:
• The motor is in steady state and the torque is below the set underload limit (LUL, LUn, rMUd parameters).
The motor is in steady state when the offset between the frequency reference and motor frequency falls below the configurable
threshold (Srb).
.
Between zero frequency and the rated frequency,
the curve reflects the following equation:
torque = LUL +
The underload function is not active for frequencies
below rMUd.
A relay or a logic output can be assigned to the signaling of this fault in the [1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-) menu.
0
LUL
LUn
rMUd FrS
Frequency
Torque as a % of
the rated torque
Underload
zone
(LUn - LUL) x (frequency)2
(rated frequency)2

189
ULd- b [PROCESS UNDERLOAD]
ULt M [Unld T. Del. Detect] 0 to 100 s 0 s
Underload detection time delay.
A value of 0 deactivates the function and renders the other parameters inaccessible.
LUn M [Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed] (1) 20 to 100% 60%
Underload threshold at rated motor frequency ([Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 32), as a % of the rated motor
torque.
LUL M [Unld.Thr.0.Speed] (1) 0 to
[Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed]
(LUn)
0%
Underload threshold at zero frequency, as a % of the rated motor torque.
rMUd M [Unld. Freq.Thr. Det.] (1) 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0 Hz
Minimum frequency underload detection threshold
Srb M [Hysteresis Freq.Att.] (1) 0.3 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0.3 Hz
Maximum deviation between the frequency reference and the motor frequency, which defines steady state
operation.
UdL M [Underload Mangmt.] [Freewheel] (YES)
nO
YES
rMP
FSt
Behavior on switching to underload detection.
v [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
FtU M [Underload T.B.Rest.] (1) 0 to 6 min 0 min
This parameter cannot be accessed if [Underload Mangmt.] (UdL) = [Ignore] (nO).
Minimum time permitted between an underload being detected and any automatic restart.

190
Process overload fault
A process overload is detected when the next event occurs and remains pending for a minimum time (tOL), which is configurable:
• The drive is in current limitation mode.
• The motor is in steady state and the current is above the set overload threshold (LOC).
The motor is in steady state when the offset between the frequency reference and motor frequency falls below the configurable
threshold (Srb).
A relay or a logic output can be assigned to the signaling of this fault in the [1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-) menu.
OLd- b [PROCESS OVERLOAD]
tOL M [Unld Time Detect.] 0 to 100 s 0 s
Overload detection time delay.
A value of 0 deactivates the function and renders the other parameters inaccessible.
LOC M [Ovld Detection Thr.] (1) 70 to 150% 110%
Overload detection threshold, as a % of the rated motor current [Rated mot. current] (nCr). This value must
be less than the limit current in order for the function to work.
Srb M [Hysteresis Freq.Att.] (1) 0.3 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0.3 Hz
Maximum deviation between the frequency reference and the motor frequency, which defines steady state
operation.
OdL M [Ovld.Proces.Mngmt] [Freewheel] (YES)
nO
YES
rMP
FSt
Behavior on switching to overload detection.
v [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
FtO M [Overload T.B.Rest.] (1) 0 to 6 min 0 min
This parameter cannot be accessed if [Ovld.Proces.Mngmt] (OdL) = [Ignore] (nO).
Minimum time permitted between an overload being detected and any automatic restart.

191
(1)The parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) and [1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menus.
(3)Warning: These settings are independent of the [AUTO DC INJECTION] (AdC-) function.
LFF- b [FALLBACK SPEED]
LFF M [Fallback speed] 0 to 500 or 1,000 Hz
according to rating
0 Hz
Selection of the fallback speed
FSt- b [RAMP DIVIDER]
dCF M [Ramp divider] (1) 0 to 10 4
The ramp that is enabled (dEC or dE2) is then divided by this coefficient when stop requests are sent.
Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time.
dCI- b [DC INJECTION]
IdC M [DC inject. level 1] (1) (3) 0.1 to 1.1 or 1.2 In (2)
according to rating
0.64 In (2)
tdI M [DC injection time 1] (1) (3) 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
IdC2 M [DC inject. level 2] (1) (3) 0.1 In (2) to [DC inject.
level 1] (IdC)
0.5 In (2)
has elapsed.
tdC M [DC injection time 2] (1) (3) 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
Maximum injection time [DC inject. level 2] (IdC2) for injection, selected as stop mode only.
(Can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) = [DC injection] (dCI)).
CAUTION
CAUTION

192
[1.9 COMMUNICATION] (COM-)
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
ENT
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
1.6 COMMAND
1.9 COMMUNICATION
1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
1.11 IDENTIFICATION
1.13 USER MENU
ENT
1.9 COMMUNICATION
COM. SCANNER INPUT
COM. SCANNER OUTPUT
MODBUS HMI
MODBUS NETWORK
CANopen
Code << >> T/K
XXX
SIM-
ESC
ESC
ENT
FCS-
LAC-
CON-
FLt-
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ESC
COMMUNICATION
Power-up

193
b [COM. SCANNER INPUT]
Only accessible via graphic display terminal
nMA1 M [Scan. IN1 address] 3201
Address of the 1st input word
Address of the 2nd input word
Address of the 3rd input word
Address of the 4th input word
b [COM. SCANNER OUTPUT]
Only accessible via graphic display terminal
nCA1 M [Scan.Out1 address] 8501
Address of the 1st
output word
Address of the 2nd
output word
Address of the 3rd
output word
Address of the 4th
output word
Address of the 5th
output word
Address of the 6th
output word
Address of the 7th
output word
Address of the 8th
output word

194
Md2- b [MODBUS HMI]
Communication with the graphic display terminal
tbr2 M [HMI baud rate] 19.2 kbps
9.6 or 19.2 kbps via the integrated display terminal.
9,600 or 19,200 bauds via the graphic display terminal.
The graphic display terminal only operates if [HMI baud rate] (tbr2) = 19,200 bauds (19.2 kbps).
In order for any change in the assignment of [HMI baud rate] (tbr2) to be taken into account you must:
- Provide confirmation in a confirmation window if using the graphic display terminal
- Press the ENT key for 2 s if using the integrated display terminal
tFO2 M [HMI format] 8E1
Read-only parameter, cannot be modified.
Md1- b [MODBUS NETWORK]
Add M [Modbus Address] OFF
OFF to 247
AMOA M [Modbus add Prg C.] OFF
Modbus address of the Controller Inside card
OFF at 247
The parameter can be accessed if the Controller Inside card has been inserted and depending on its
configuration (please consult the specific documentation).
AMOC M [Modbus add Com.C.] OFF
Modbus address of the communication card
OFF to 247
The parameter can be accessed if a communication card has been inserted and depending on its
configuration (please consult the specific documentation).
tbr M [Modbus baud rate] 19.2 kbps
4.8 – 9.6 – 19.2 – 38.4 kbps on the integrated display terminal.
4,800, 9,600, 19,200 or 38,400 bauds on the graphic display terminal.
tFO M [Modbus format] 8E1
8O1 – 8E1 – 8n1, 8n2
ttO M [Modbus time out] 10.0 s
0.1 to 30 s
CnO- b [CANopen]
AdCO M [CANopen address] OFF
OFF to 127
bdCO M [CANopen bit rate] 125 kbps
50 – 125 – 250 – 500 kbps – 1 Mbps
ErCO M [Error code]
Read-only parameter, cannot be modified.

195
- b [COMMUNICATION CARD]
See the specific documentation for the card used.
LCF- b [FORCED LOCAL]
FLO M [Forced local assign.] [No] (nO)
nO
LI1
-
LI14
v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
Forcing to local is active when the input is at state 1.
[Forced local assign.] (FLO) is forced to [No] (nO) if [Profile] (CHCF) page 108 = [I/O profile] (IO).
FLOC M [Forced local Ref.] [No] (nO)
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
LCC
PI
v [No] (nO): Not assigned (control via the terminals with zero reference).
v [HMI] (LCC): Assignment of the reference and command to the graphic display terminal.
Reference: [HMI Frequency ref.] (LFr), page 41, control: RUN/STOP/FWD/REV buttons.
v [RP] (PI): Frequency input, if VW3A3202 card has been inserted
If the reference is assigned to an analog input, or [RP] (PI), the command is automatically assigned to the
terminals as well (logic inputs).
FLOt M [Time-out forc. local] 10.0 s
0.1 to 30 s
The parameter can be accessed if [Forced local assign.] (FLO) is not [No] (nO).
Time delay before communication monitoring is resumed on leaving forced local mode.

196
[1.10 DIAGNOSTICS]
This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal:
This screen indicates the state of the drive at the
moment the selected fault occurred.
This screen indicates the number of
communication faults, for example, with the option
cards.
Number: 0 to 65,535
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
ENT
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
1.6 COMMAND
1.9 COMMUNICATION
1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
1.11 IDENTIFICATION
1.13 USER MENU
ENT
1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
FAULT HISTORY
CURRENT FAULT LIST
MORE FAULT INFO
TEST PROCEDURES
SERVICE MESSAGE
Code << >> T/K
FAULT HISTORY
internal com. link
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
Code T/K
CURRENT FAULT LIST
internal com. link
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
Code T/K
MORE FAULT INFO
Network fault 0
Application fault 0
Internal link fault 1 0
Internal link fault 2 0
Code T/K
ENT
ENT
internal com. link
Drive state RDY
ETA status word ...
ETI status word ...
Cmd word ...
Motor current ...
HELP T/K
Output frequency ...
Elapsed time ...
Mains voltage ...
Motor thermal state ...
Command Channel ...
Channel ref. active ...

197
[1.10 DIAGNOSTICS]
[TEST THYRISTORS] is only accessible for ATV61pppM3 u 18.5 kW (25 HP) and ATV61pppN4 > 18.5 kW (25 HP) drives.
Note: To start the tests, press and hold down (2 s) the ENT key.
The result for each IGBT is displayed
on 2 lines:
- The first line shows whether or not it
has short-circuited
- The second line shows whether or not
it is open
ENT
TEST PROCEDURES
THYRISTORS TEST
TRANSISTOR TEST
T/K
ENT
THYRISTORS TEST
ENT to perform the test
ESC to cancel
ENT
2 s
TEST IN PROGRESS
THYRISTORS RESULT
Thyristor 1 Failed
Thyristor 2 OK
Thyristor 3 OK
T/K
TRANSISTOR TEST
Check that a motor is connected.
Enter the motor nameplate data.
ENT to perform the test
ESC to cancel
ENT
2 s
TEST IN PROGRESS
TRANSISTOR RESULT
IGBT 1 OK
IGBT 1 OK
IGBT 2 OK
IGBT 2 Open
IGBT 3 OK
T/K
IGBT 3 OK
IGBT 4 OK
IGBT 4 OK
IGBT 5 OK
IGBT 5 OK
IGBT 6 short-circuit
IGBT 6 OK

198
[1.11 IDENTIFICATION]
The [1.11 IDENTIFICATION] menu can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal.
This is a read-only menu that cannot be configured. It enables the following information to be displayed:
• Drive reference, power rating and voltage
• Drive software version
• Drive serial number
• Type of options present, with their software version
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
ENT
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
1.6 COMMAND
1.9 COMMUNICATION
1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
1.11 IDENTIFICATION
1.13 USER MENU
ENT
1.11 IDENTIFICATION
ATV61HU15N4
xx.x kW / yy.y HP
380/480 V
Appli. Software Vx.x IE xx
MC Software Vx.x IE xx
<< >> T/K
6W0410xxxxxxxxxx
product Vx.x
OPTION 1
I/O EXTENSION CARD
Vx.x IE xx
OPTION 2
FIPIO CARD
Vx.x IE xx
GRAPHIC TERMINAL
GRAPHIC S
Vx.x IE xx
ENCODER
RS 422

199
[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-)
The [1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-) menu is used to:
• Replace the current configuration with the factory configuration or a configuration saved previously.
All or part of the current configuration can be replaced: Select a group of parameters in order to select the menus you wish to load
with the selected source configuration.
• Save the current configuration to a file.
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
ENT
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
1.6 COMMAND
1.9 COMMUNICATION
1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
1.11 IDENTIFICATION
1.13 USER MENU
ENT
Config. Source : Macro-Conf
PARAMETER GROUP LIST
Goto FACTORY SETTINGS
Save config : No
Code << >> T/K
XXX
SIM-
ESC
ESC
ENT
FCS-
LAC-
CON-
ESC
ESC
ENT
ESC
FACTORY SETTINGS
Power-up

200
Selection of source configuration
Command to return to “factory
settings”
This window appears if no group
of parameters is selected.
ENT
RUN Term 1250A +50.00 Hz
Config. Source : Macro-Conf
Save config : No
Code << >> T/K
ENT
ENT
ENT
Config. Source
Macro-Conf
Config 1
Config 2
T/K
All
Drive menu
Settings
Motor param
Comm. menu
Code T/K
Selection of the menus to be
replaced
Note: In factory configuration
and after a return to “factory
settings”, [PARAMETER
GROUP LIST] will be empty.
PLEASE CHECK THAT
THE DRIVE WIRING IS OK
ESC=abort ENT=validate
First select the
parameter group(s)
Press ENT or ESC
to continue
Save config
No
Config 0
Config 1
Config 2
T/K

201
List of motor parameters
[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu:
[Rated motor power] (nPr) – [Rated motor volt.] (UnS) – [Rated mot. current] (nCr) – [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) – [Rated motor speed] (nSP) –
[Auto tuning] (tUn) – [Auto tuning status] (tUS) – [U/F Profile] (PFL) – [U0] (U0) to [U5] (U5) – [F1] (F1) to [F5] (F5) – [V. constant power]
(UCP) - [Freq. Const Power] (FCP) – [Nominal I sync.] (nCrS) – [Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS) – [Pole pairs] (PPnS) – [Syn. EMF constant]
(PHS) – [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS) – [Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) – [Cust. stator R syn] (rSAS) – [IR compensation] (UFr) – [Slip compensation]
(SLP) – motor parameters that can be accessed in [Expert] mode, page 68.
[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu:
[Mot. therm. current] (ItH)
Example of total return to factory settings
1. [Config. Source] (FCSI) = [Macro-Conf] (InI)
2. [PARAMETER GROUP LIST] (FrY-) = [All] (ALL)
3. [Goto FACTORY SETTINGS] (GFS = YES)
FCSI M [Config. Source]
InI
CFG1
CFG2
Choice of source configuration. The parameter cannot be accessed if the drive has locked on an
[Incorrect config.] (CFF) fault.
v [Macro-Conf] (InI) Factory configuration, return to selected macro configuration.
v [Config 1] (CFG1)
v [Config 2] (CFG2)
If the configuration switching function is configured, it will not be possible to access [Config 1] (CFG1) and
[Config 2] (CFG2).
FrY-
M [PARAMETER GROUP LIST]
ALL
drM
SEt
MOt
COM
PLC
MOn
dIS
Selection of menus to be loaded
v [All] (ALL) : All parameters.
v [Drive menu] (drM): The [1 DRIVE MENU] menu without [1.9 COMMUNICATION] and [1.14
PROGRAMMABLE CARD]. In the [7 DISPLAY CONFIG.] menu, [Return std name] page 213 returns to [No].
v [Settings] (SEt): The [1.3 SETTINGS] menu without the [IR compensation] (UFr), [Slip compensation] (SLP)
and [Mot. therm. current] (ItH) parameters.
v [Motor param] (MOt): Motor parameters, see list below.
The following selections can only be accessed if [Config. Source] (FCSI) = [Macro-Conf.] (InI):
v [Comm. menu] (COM): The [1.9 COMMUNICATION] menu without either [Scan. IN1 address] (nMA1) to
[Scan. IN8 address] (nMA8) or [Scan.Out1 address] (nCA1) to [Scan.Out8 address] (nCA8).
v [Prog. card menu] (PLC): the [1.14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD] menu.
v [Monitor config.] (MOn): The [6 MONITORING CONFIG.] menu.
v [Display config.] (dIS): the [7 DISPLAY CONFIG.] menu.
See the multiple selection procedure on page 22 for the integrated display terminal and page 13 for the graphic
display terminal.
Note: In factory configuration and after a return to “factory settings”, [PARAMETER GROUP LIST] will
be empty.
GFS M [Goto FACTORY SETTINGS]
nO
YES
It is only possible to revert to the factory settings if at least one group of parameters has previously been
selected.
- No
- Yes: The parameter changes back to nO automatically as soon as the operation is complete.
With the graphic display terminal: See the previous page.
SCSI M [Save config]
nO
Str0
Str1
Str2
v [No] (nO):
v [Config 0] (Str0): Press the “ENT” key for 2 s.
The active configuration to be saved does not appear for selection. For example, if the active configuration is
[Config 0] (Str0), only [Config 1] (Str1) and [Config 2] (Str2) appear. The parameter changes back to [No] (nO)
automatically as soon as the operation is complete.

202
[1.13 USER MENU] (USr-)
This menu contains the parameters selected in the [7 DISPLAY CONFIG.] menu on page 212.
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
ENT
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
1.6 COMMAND
1.9 COMMUNICATION
1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
1.11 IDENTIFICATION
1.13 USER MENU
ENT
1.13 USER MENU
<< >> T/K
XXX
SIM-
ESC
ESC
ENT
LAC-
USr-
FCS-
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ESC
USER MENU
Power-up

203
[1.14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD] (PLC-)
This menu can only be accessed if a Controller Inside card has been inserted. Please refer to the documentation specific to this card.
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
ENT
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
1.6 COMMAND
1.9 COMMUNICATION
1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
1.11 IDENTIFICATION
1.13 USER MENU
ENT
<< >> T/K
XXX
SIM-
ESC
ESC
ENT
COd-
LAC-
SPL-
USr-
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ESC
PROGRAMMABLE CARD
Power-up

204
[3. OPEN / SAVE AS]
This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal.
[OPEN]: To download one of the 4 files from the graphic display terminal to the drive.
[SAVE AS]: To download the current configuration from the drive to the graphic display terminal.
Various messages may appear when the download is requested:
• [IN PROGRESS]
• [DONE]
• Error messages if download not possible
• [Motor parameters are NOT COMPATIBLE. Do you want to continue?]: In this case the download is possible, but the parameters will
be restricted.
See details on
the next page
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
ENT
3. OPEN / SAVE AS
OPEN
SAVE AS
Code << >> T/K
ENT
3. OPEN / SAVE AS
OPEN
SAVE AS
Code << >> T/K
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
Note: Opening an empty
file has no effect.
OPEN
File 1
File 2 Empty
File 3 Empty
File 4 Empty
Code << >> T/K
ENT
DOWNLOAD GROUP
None
All
Drive menu
Motor parameters
Communication
Code T/K
Prog. control. inside card
DOWNLOAD
PLEASE CHECK THAT
THE DRIVE WIRING IS OK
ESC = abort ENT = continue
Code T/K
Saving to a used file
deletes and replaces the
configuration contained in
this file.
SAVE AS
File 1 Used
File 2 Free
File 3 Free
File 4 Free
Code T/K
DOWNLOAD
IN PROGRESS
Code T/K
DOWNLOAD
DONE
ENT or ESC to continue
Code T/K

205
[3. OPEN / SAVE AS]
[DOWNLOAD GROUP]
[None]: No parameters
[All]: All parameters in all menus
[Drive menu]: The entire [1 DRIVE MENU] without [1.9 COMMUNICATION]
and [1.14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD].
[Motor parameters]: [Rated motor power] (nPr) in the [1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu
[Rated motor volt.] (UnS)
[Rated mot. current] (nCr)
[Rated motor freq.] (FrS)
[Rated motor speed] (nSP)
[Auto tuning] (tUn)
[Auto tuning status] (tUS)
[U/F Profile] (PFL)
[U0] (U0) to [U5] (U5)
[F1] (F1) to [F5] (F5)
[V. constant power] (UCP)
[Freq. Const Power] (FCP)
[Nominal I sync.] (nCrS)
[Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS)
[Pole pairs] (PPnS)
[Syn. EMF constant] (PHS)
[Autotune L d-axis] (LdS)
[Autotune L q-axis] (LqS)
[Cust. stator R syn] (rSAS)
[IR compensation] (UFr)
[Slip compensation] (SLP)
The motor parameters that can
be accessed in [Expert] mode,
page 68
[Mot. therm. current] (ItH) in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu
[Communication]: All the parameters in the [1.9 COMMUNICATION] menu
[Prog. control. inside card]: All the parameters in the [1.14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD] menu

206
[4. PASSWORD] (COd-)
Enables the configuration to be protected with an access code or a password to be entered in order to access a protected configuration.
Example with graphic display terminal:
• The drive is unlocked when the PIN codes are set to [Unlocked] (OFF) (no password) or when the correct code has been entered.
• Before protecting the configuration with an access code, you must:
- Define the [Upload rights] (ULr) and [Download rights] (dLr).
- Make a careful note of the code and keep it in a safe place where you will always be able to find it.
• The drive has 2 access codes, enabling 2 access levels to be set up.
- PIN code 1 is a public unlock code: 6969.
- PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support. It can only be accessed in [Expert] mode.
- Only one PIN1 or PIN2 code can be used – the other must remain set to [OFF] (OFF).
Note: When the unlock code is entered, the user access code appears.
The following items are access-protected:
• Return to factory settings ( [1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-) menu.
• The channels and parameters protected by the [1.13 USER MENU] as well as the menu itself.
• The custom display settings ([7 DISPLAY CONFIG.] menu).
4 PASSWORD PIN code 1
Status : Unlocked
9520
PIN code 1 : Unlocked
Upload rights : Permitted
Download rights : Unlock. drv Min = Unlocked Max = 9,999
Code << >> T/K << >> T/K
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
ENT
4 PASSWORD
Status : Unlocked
Upload rights : Permitted
Download rights : Unlock. drv
Code << >> T/K
XXX
SIM-
ESC
ESC
ENT
LAC-
ESC
ENT
ESC
COd-
PASSWORD
Power-up

207
[4. PASSWORD] (COd-)
CSt M [Status] [Unlocked] (ULC)
LC
ULC
Information parameter, cannot be modified.
v [Locked] (LC): The drive is locked by a password.
v [Unlocked] (ULC): The drive is not locked by a password.
COd M [PIN code 1] OFF to 9,999 [OFF] (OFF)
1st
access code. The value [OFF] (OFF) indicates that no password has been set [Unlocked]. The value
[ON] (On) indicates that the drive is protected and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it. Once
the correct code has been entered, it remains on the display and the drive is unlocked until the next time the
power supply is disconnected.
- PIN code 1 is a public unlock code: 6969.
COd2 M [PIN code 2] OFF to 9,999 [OFF] (OFF)
Parameter can only be accessed in [Expert] mode.
2nd
access code. The value [OFF] (OFF) indicates that no password has been set [Unlocked]. The value
[ON] (On) indicates that the drive is protected and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it. Once
the correct code has been entered, it remains on the display and the drive is unlocked until the next time the
power supply is disconnected.
- PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support.
ULr M [Upload rights] [Permitted] (ULr0)
ULr0
ULr1
Read or copy the current configuration to the drive
v [Permitted] (ULr0): The current drive configuration can always be uploaded to the graphic display terminal
or PowerSuite.
v [Not allowed] (ULr1): The current drive configuration can only be uploaded to the graphic display terminal
or PowerSuite if the drive is not protected by an access code or if the correct code has been entered.
dLr M [Download rights] [Unlock. drv] (dLr1)
dLr0
dLr1
dLr2
dLr3
Writes the current configuration to the drive or downloads a configuration to the drive
v [Locked drv] (dLr0): A configuration file can only be downloaded to the drive if the drive is protected by an
access code, which is the same as the access code for the configuration to be downloaded.
v [Unlock. drv] (dLr1): A configuration file can be downloaded to the drive or a configuration in the drive can
be modified if the drive is unlocked (access code entered) or is not protected by an access code.
v [not allowed] (dLr2): Download not authorized.
v [Lock/unlock] (dLr3): Combination of [Locked drv] (dLr0) and [Unlock. drv] (dLr1).

208
[6 MONITORING CONFIG.]
This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal.
This can be used to configure the information displayed on the graphic display screen during operation.
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
7 DISPLAY CONFIG.
ENT
6.1 PARAM. BAR SELECT
6.2 MONITOR SCREEN TYPE
6.3 COM. MAP CONFIG.
Code << >> T/K
[6.1 PARAM. BAR SELECT]: Selection of 1 to 2 parameters displayed on the top line (the first 2 cannot be modified).
[6.2. MONITOR SCREEN TYPE]: Selection of parameters displayed in the centre of the screen and the display mode (values in digita
or bar graph format).
[6.3. COM. MAP CONFIG.]: Selection of the words displayed and their format.
6.1 PARAM. BAR SELECT
6.2 MONITOR SCREEN TYPE
6.3 COM. MAP CONFIG.
Code << >> T/K

209
Name/Description
b [6.1 PARAM. BAR SELECT]
v [Alarm groups]
v [Frequency ref.]
v [Output frequency]
v [Motor current]
v [Motor speed]
v [Motor voltage]
v [Motor power]
v [Motor torque]
v [Mains voltage]
v [Motor thermal state]
v [Drv. thermal state]
v [DBR thermal state]
v [Input Power]
v [Consumption]
v [Run time]
v [Power on time]
v [IGBT alarm counter]
v [PID reference]
v [PID feedback]
v [PID error]
v [PID Output]
v [- - - - 2]
to
v [- - - - 6]
v [Config. active]
v [Utilised param. set]
v [Local / Remote]
in Hz: parameter displayed in factory configuration
in Hz
in A
in rpm
in V
in W
as a %
in V
as a %
as a %
as a %
in W or kW depending on drive rating
in Wh or kWh depending on drive rating
in hours (length of time the motor has been switched on)
in hours (length of time the drive has been switched on)
in seconds (total time of IGBT overheating alarms)
as a %
as a %
as a %
in Hz
CNFO, 1 or 2 (see page 162)
SET1, 2 or 3 (see page 160)
Display factory configuration. “LOC” appears if the command and reference are set via the graphic
display terminal; otherwise, “REM” appears. This corresponds to the state selected by the [T/K]
function key, page 111.
Select the parameter using ENT (a then appears next to the parameter). Parameter(s) can also be deselected using ENT.
1 or 2 parameters can be selected.
Example:
PARAM. BAR SELECT
MONITORING
- - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - -

210
Name/Description
b [6.2. MONITOR SCREEN TYPE]
M [Display value type]
v [Digital]: Display of one or two digital values on the screen (factory configuration).
v [Bar graph]: Display of one or two bar graphs on the screen.
v [List]: Display a list of between one and five values on the screen.
M [PARAMETER SELECTION]
v [Alarm groups]
v [Frequency ref.]
v [Output frequency]
v [Motor current]
v [Motor speed]
v [Motor voltage]
v [Motor power]
v [Motor torque]
v [Mains voltage]
v [Motor thermal state]
v [Drv. thermal state]
v [DBR thermal state]
v [Input Power]
v [Consumption]
v [Run time]
v [Power on time]
v [IGBT alarm counter]
v [PID reference]
v [PID feedback]
v [PID error]
v [PID Output]
v [- - - - 2]
to
v [- - - - 6]
v [Config. active]
v [Utilised param. set]
can only be accessed if [Display value type] = [List]
in Hz: parameter displayed in factory configuration
in Hz
in A
in rpm
in V
in W
as a %
in V
as a %
as a %
as a %
in W or kW depending on drive rating
in Wh or kWh depending on drive rating
in hours (length of time the motor has been switched on)
in hours (length of time the drive has been switched on)
in seconds (total time of IGBT overheating alarms)
as a %
as a %
as a %
in Hz
CNFO, 1 or 2 (see page 162), can only be accessed if [Display value type] = [List]
SET1, 2 or 3 (see page 160), can only be accessed if [Display value type] = [List]
Select the parameter(s) using ENT (a then appears next to the parameter). Parameter(s) can also be deselected using ENT.
Examples:
PARAMETER SELECTION
MONITORING
- - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - -
Display of 2 digital values Display of 2 bar graphs Display of a list of
5 values
RUN Term +35.00 Hz REM RUN Term +35.00 Hz REM RUN Term +35.00 Hz REM
Motor speed Min Motor speed max MONITORING
1,250 rpm 0 1,250 rpm 1,500 Frequency ref. : 50.1 Hz
Motor current : 80 A
Motor current Min Motor current max Motor speed : 1,250 rpm
80 A 0 80 A 150 Motor thermal state : 80%
Drv thermal state : 80%
T/K T/K T/K

211
Name/Description
b [6.3. COM. MAP CONFIG.]
M [Word 1 add. select.]
Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the <<, >> (F2 and F3) keys and rotating the navigation button.
M [Format word 1]
Format of word 1.
v [Hex]: Hexadecimal
v [Signed]: Decimal with sign
v [Unsigned]: Decimal without sign
M [Format word 2]
Format of word 2.
M [Format word 3]
Format of word 3.
M [Format word 4]
Format of word 4.
It will then be possible to view the selected words in the [COMMUNICATION MAP] submenu of the [1.2 MONITORING] menu.
Example:
COMMUNICATION MAP
- - - - - - - -- -
- - - - -- - - - -
W3141 : F230 Hex
<< >> T/K

212
[7 DISPLAY CONFIG.]
This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal. It can be used to customize parameters or a menu and to access
parameters.
7.1 USER PARAMETERS: Customization of 1 to 15 parameters.
7.2 USER MENU: Creation of a customized menu.
7.3 PARAMETER ACCESS: Customization of the visibility and protection mechanisms of menus and parameters.
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code T/K
7 DISPLAY CONFIG.
ENT
Rdy Term +0.00 Hz REM
7 DISPLAY CONFIG.
7.1 USER PARAMETERS
7.2 USER MENU
7.3 PARAMETER ACCESS
Code << >> T/K

213
[7 DISPLAY CONFIG.]
If [Return std name] = [Yes] the display reverts to standard but the custom settings remain stored.
Selection of 1 to 15 parameters
to be customized
Note: The 1st
line is [PARAMETER SELECTION] or
[RDY Term +0.00 Hz REM] depending on the path (ENT or List).
List of customized parameters
If no custom settings have
been made, the
standard value appears
(names, units, etc.).
Display on 1 or 2 lines of
characters
Offsets and coefficients are
numerical values. Do not
use too high a multiplier
(99,999 – max display).
Use F1 to change to ABC, abc, 123, *[-.
Use the navigation selector button to increment the character
(alphabetical order) and << and >> (F2 and F3) to switch to the
next or previous character respectively.
- Standard: use of the factory set
unit
- Customized: customization of
the unit
-%, mA, etc.: select from drop-
down list
Once you have entered the unit, if you press ENT, the Ramp
increment screen will re-appear in order to display the name.
Press ESC to return to Unit.
The message entered appears
while the “View” button is pressed.
Names (USER MENU NAME, DRIVE NAME, configuration, serial no., lines of messages,
names of units, etc.) are customized as in the example of the parameter name shown opposite.
If no custom settings have been made, the standard value appears (names, units, etc.).
Display on 1 or 2 lines of characters.
Use F1 to change to ABC, abc, 123, *[-.
Use the navigation selector button to increment the character (alphabetical order) and << and >>
(F2 and F3) to switch to the next or previous character respectively.
7.1 USER PARAMETERS
Return std name : No
PARAMETER SELECTION
CUSTOMIZED SELECTION
USER MENU NAME
DEVICE NAME
Code << >> T/K
SERVICE MESSAGE
CONFIGURATION 0
CONFIGURATION 1
CONFIGURATION 2
ATV SERIAL NUMBER
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
Unit
Standard
Customized
%
mA
T/K
List
PARAMETER SELECTION
1.3 SETTINGS
Ramp increment
Acceleration
Deceleration
Acceleration 2
Deceleration 2
List
PARAMETER SELECTION
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
CUSTOMIZED SELECTION
Ramp increment
Acceleration
Speed prop. gain
Delete
Ramp increment
User name
Unit
Multiplier
Divisor
Offset
User name
1. DRIVE MENU
FLOW REFERENCE
Nb characters max. 13
ABC << >>
Customized
1. DRIVE MENU
LBS
ABC << >>
SERVICE MESSAGE
LINE 1
LINE 2
LINE 3
LINE 4
LINE 5
View T/K
LINE 2
1. DRIVE MENU
For any service, dial:
ABC << >> T/K
USER MENU NAME
1. DRIVE MENU
FLOW REFERENCE
ABC << >> T/K

214
[7 DISPLAY CONFIG.]
Selection of parameters
included in the user menu
Note: The 1st line is
[PARAMETER SELECTION]
or
[RDY Term +0.00 Hz REM]
depending on the path
(ENT or List).
Parameter list
making up the user menu.
Use the F2 and F3 keys to
arrange the parameters in the
list (example below using F3).
7.2 USER MENU
PARAMETER SELECTION
SELECTED LIST
Code << >> T/K
ENT
ENT
ENT
PARAMETER SELECTION
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code << >> T/K
PARAMETER SELECTION
1.3 SETTINGS
Ramp increment
Acceleration
Deceleration
Acceleration 2
Deceleration 2
List
List
SELECTED LIST
Ramp increment
Acceleration
Speed prop. gain
Delete Up Down
SELECTED LIST
Acceleration
Ramp increment
Speed prop. gain
Delete Up Down

215
[7 DISPLAY CONFIG.]
Note: The protected parameters are no longer accessible and are not, therefore, displayed for the selected channels.
Selection to display all
parameters or only the
active parameters.
Press ESC to exit this screen.
You remain exclusively
in the [1. DRIVE MENU]
menu. All menus are
selected by default.
Press ENT to deselect a menu.
Press ENT to reselect a menu.
IMPORTANT: The protected channel (or channels) must be
selected, as a protected parameter on a selected channel
remains accessible on the channels that are not selected.
In these screens all parameters in the
[1. DRIVE MENU] menu can be
protected and are displayed for
selection, except for the Expert
parameters.
Press the All button to select all the
parameters. Press the All button again to
deselect all the parameters.
7.3 PARAMETER ACCESS
PROTECTION
VISIBILITY
Code << >> T/K
ENT
ENT
VISIBILITY
PARAMETERS
MENUS
Code T/K
ENT
ENT
PARAMETERS
Active
All
T/K
ENT
MENUS
1. DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
PROTECTION
PROTECTED CHANNELS
PROTECTED PARAMS
Code T/K
PROTECTED CHANNELS
HMI
POWERSUITE
MODBUS
CANopen
COM. CARD
Code T/K
PROG. CARD
PROTECTED PARAMS
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SIMPLY START
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
ENT
PROTECTED PARAMS
1.3 SETTINGS
Ramp increment
Acceleration
Deceleration
Acceleration 2
Deceleration 2
All
ENT
ENT
PROTECTED PARAMS
REF. OPERATIONS
RAMP
STOP CONFIGURATION
AUTO DC INJECTION
JOG
No selections can be made in this
screen if there are no parameters.
PROTECTED PARAMS
JOG
JOG
Jog frequency
Jog delay

216
[MULTIPOINT SCREEN]
Communication is possible between a graphic display terminal and a number of drives connected on the same bus. The addresses of the
drives must be configured in advance in the [1.9 COMMUNICATION] menu using the [Modbus Address] (Add) parameter, page 194.
When a number of drives are connected to the same display terminal, the terminal automatically displays the following screens:
All menus can be accessed in multipoint mode. Only drive control via the graphic display terminal is not authorized, apart from
the Stop key, which locks all the drives.
If there is a fault on a drive, this drive is displayed.
Selection of drives for multipoint dialog (select each address and check it by pressing
ENT).
This screen only appears when making a connection for the first time or if the "Cfg
Add" button is pressed in the MULTIPOINT SCREEN below.
Selection of a drive for multipoint dialog.
In multipoint mode, the command channel is not displayed. The state,
then the 2 selected parameters and the drive address appear from left
to right.
ENT
ESC
ESC
ENT
Cfg Add
CONNECTION IN PROGRESS
Vxxxxxx
MULTI-POINT ADDRESSES
Address 1
Address 2
Address 3
Address 4
Address 5
Address 6
MULTIPOINT SCREEN
Rdy 0 Rpm 0 A 2
RUN +952 Rpm 101 A 3
NLP +1500 Rpm 1250 A 4
Not connected 5
Rdy + 0 Rpm 0 A 6
Cfg Add
RUN +952 Rpm 101 A 3
Motor speed
Motor current
HOME T/K
+952 rpm
101 A

217
Maintenance
Servicing
The Altivar 61 does not require any preventive maintenance. It is nevertheless advisable to perform the following regularly:
• Check the condition and tightness of the connections.
• Ensure that the temperature around the unit remains at an acceptable level and that ventilation is effective (average service life of
fans: 3 to 5 years depending on the operating conditions).
• Remove any dust from the drive.
Assistance with maintenance, fault display
If a problem arises during setup or operation, first check that the recommendations relating to the environment, mounting and connections
have been observed.
The first fault detected is saved and displayed, and the drive locks.
The drive switching to fault mode can be indicated remotely via a logic output or a relay, which can be configured in the [1.5 INPUTS /
OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-) menu, see, for example, [R1 CONFIGURATION] (r1-) page 89.
[1.10 DIAGNOSTICS] menu
This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal. It displays faults and their cause in plain text and can be used to carry
out tests, see page 196.
Clearing the fault
Disconnect the drive power supply in the event of a non-resettable fault.
Wait for the display to disappear completely.
Find the cause of the fault in order to correct it.
The drive is unlocked after a fault:
• By switching off the drive until the display disappears completely, then switching on again
• Automatically in the scenarios described for the [AUTOMATIC RESTART] (Atr-) function, page 173
• By means of a logic input or control bit assigned to the [FAULT RESET] (rSt-) function, page 172
• By pressing the STOP/RESET button on the graphic display terminal
[1.2 MONITORING] (SUP-) menu:
This is used to prevent and find the causes of faults by displaying the drive state and its current values.
It can be accessed with the integrated display terminal.
Spares and repairs:
Consult Schneider Electric product support.

218
Faults – Causes – Remedies
Starter does not start, no fault displayed
• If the display does not light up, check the power supply to the drive.
• The assignment of the “Fast stop” or “Freewheel” functions will prevent the drive starting if the corresponding logic inputs are not
powered up. The ATV61 then displays [Freewheel] (nSt) in freewheel stop and [Fast stop] (FSt) in fast stop. This is normal since
these functions are active at zero so that the drive will be stopped safely if there is a wire break.
• Make sure that the run command input or inputs are activated in accordance with the selected control mode ([2/3 wire control] (tCC)
and [2 wire type] (tCt) parameters, page 76).
• If the reference channel or command channel is assigned to a communication bus, when the power supply is connected, the drive
will display [Freewheel] (nSt) and remain in stop mode until the communication bus sends a command.
Faults, which cannot be reset automatically
The cause of the fault must be removed before resetting by turning off and then back on.
AI2F, EnF, SOF, SPF, and tnF faults can also be reset remotely by means of a logic input or control bit ([Fault reset] (rSF) parameter,
page 172).
EnF, InFA, InFb, SOF, SPF, and tnF faults can be inhibited and cleared remotely by means of a logic input or control bit ([Fault inhibit
assign.] (InH) parameter, page 183).
Fault Name Probable cause Remedy
AI2F [AI2 input] • Non-conforming signal on analog
input AI2
• Check the wiring of analog input AI2 and the value of the
signal
bOF [DBR overload] • The braking resistor is under excessive
stress
• Check the size of the resistor and wait for it to cool down
• Check the [DB Resistor Power] (brP) and [DB Resistor value]
(brU) parameters, page 186.
bUF [DB unit sh. Circuit] • Short-circuit output from braking unit • Check the wiring of the braking unit and the resistor
• Check the braking resistor
CrF1 [Precharge] • Load relay control fault or charging
resistor damaged
• Switch the drive off and then back on again
• Check the internal connections
• Inspect/repair the drive
CrF2 [Thyr. soft charge] • DC bus charging fault (thyristors)
EEF1 [Control Eeprom] • Internal memory fault, control card • Check the environment (electromagnetic compatibility)
• Turn off, reset, return to factory settings
EEF2 [Power Eeprom] • Internal memory fault, power card
FCF1 [Out. contact.
stuck]
• The output contactor remains closed
although the opening conditions have
been met
• Check the contactor and its wiring
• Check the feedback circuit
HdF [IGBT
desaturation]
• Short-circuit or grounding at the drive
output
• Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the
insulation of the motor
• Perform the diagnostic tests via the [1.10 DIAGNOSTICS]
menu.
ILF [internal com. link] • Communication fault between option
card and drive
• Check the environment (electromagnetic compatibility)
• Check the connections
• Check that no more than 2 option cards (max. permitted)
have been installed on the drive
• Replace the option card
InF1 [Rating error] • The power card is different from the
card stored
• Check the reference of the power card
InF2 [Incompatible PB] • The power card is incompatible with the
control card
• Check the reference of the power card and its compatibility
InF3 [Internal serial link] • Communication fault between the
internal cards
• Check the internal connections

219
Faults, which cannot be reset automatically (continued)
InF4 [Internal MFG area] • Internal data inconsistent • Recalibrate the drive (performed by Schneider Electric
Product Support)
InF6 [Internal-option] • The option installed in the drive is not
recognized
• Check the reference and compatibility of the option
InF7 [Internal-hard init.] • Initialization of the drive is incomplete • Turn off and reset
InF8 [Internal-ctrl
supply]
• The control power supply is incorrect • Check the control section power supply
InF9 [Internal-
I measure]
• The current measurements are incorrect • Replace the current sensors or the power card
InFA [Internal-mains
circuit]
• The input stage is not operating
correctly
menu.
InFb [Internal- th.
sensor]
• The drive temperature sensor is not
operating correctly
• Replace the temperature sensor
InFC [Internal-time
meas.]
• Fault on the electronic time
measurement component
InFE [internal- CPU] • Internal microprocessor fault • Turn off and reset. Inspect/repair the drive
OCF [Overcurrent] • Parameters in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-)
and [1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)
menus are not correct
• Inertia or load too high
• Mechanical locking
• Check the parameters
• Check the size of the motor/drive/load
• Check the state of the mechanism
PrF [Power removal] • Fault with the drive’s “Power removal”
safety function
SCF1 [Motor short circuit] • Short-circuit or grounding at the drive
output
• Significant earth leakage current at
the drive output if several motors are
connected in parallel
• Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the
insulation of the motor
menu.
• Reduce the switching frequency
• Connect chokes in series with the motor
SCF2 [Impedant sh.
circuit]
SCF3 [Ground short
circuit]
SOF [Overspeed] • Instability or driving load too high • Check the motor, gain and stability parameters
• Add a braking resistor
• Check the size of the motor/drive/load
tnF [Auto-tuning] • Special motor or motor whose power
is not suitable for the drive
• Motor not connected to the drive
• Check that the motor/drive are compatible
•
• Check that the motor is present during auto-tuning
• If an output contactor is being used, close it during auto-
tuning

220
Faults that can be reset with the automatic restart function, after the cause has disappeared
These faults can also be reset by turning on and off or by means of a logic input or control bit ([Fault reset] (rSF) parameter, page 172).
APF, CnF, COF, EPF1, EPF2, FCF2, LFF2, LFF3, LFF4, nFF, ObF, OHF, OLC, OLF, OPF1, OPF2, OSF, OtF1, OtF2, OtFL, PHF, PtF1,
PtF2, PtFL, SLF1, SLF2, SLF3, SPIF, SSF, tJF, and ULF faults can be inhibited and cleared remotely by means of a logic input or control
bit ([Fault inhibit assign.] (InH) parameter, page 183).
APF [Application fault] • Controller Inside card fault • Please refer to the card documentation
CnF [Com. network] • Communication fault on
communication card
• Check the environment (electromagnetic compatibility)
• Check the wiring
• Check the time-out
• Replace the option card
COF [CAN com.] • Interruption in communication on the
CANopen bus
• Check the communication bus
• Refer to the CANopen User's Manual
EPF1 [External flt-LI/Bit] • Fault triggered by an external device,
depending on user
• Check the device, which caused the fault, and reset
EPF2 [External fault
com.]
• Fault triggered by a communication
network
• Check for the cause of the fault and reset
FCF2 [Out. contact.
open.]
• The output contactor remains open
although the closing conditions have
been met.
• Check the feedback circuit
LCF [input contactor] • The drive is not turned on even though
[Mains V. time out] (LCt) has elapsed.
• Check the line/contactor/drive connection
LFF2
LFF3
LFF4
[AI2 4-20mA loss]
[AI3 4-20mA loss]
[AI4 4-20mA loss]
• Loss of the 4-20 mA reference on
analog input AI2, AI3 or AI4
• Check the connection on the analog inputs
nFF [No Flow Fault] • Zero fluid • Check and rectify the cause of the fault.
• Check the zero fluid detection parameters page 166.
ObF [Overbraking] • Braking too sudden or driving load • Increase the deceleration time
• Install a braking resistor if necessary
• Activate the [Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) function, page 122,
if it is compatible with the application.
OHF [Drive overheat] • Drive temperature too high • Check the motor load, the drive ventilation and the ambient
temperature. Wait for the drive to cool down before restarting
OLC [Proc. Overload Flt] • Process overload • Check and remove the cause of the overload.
• Check the parameters of the [PROCESS UNDERLOAD]
(OLd-) function, page 190.
OLF [Motor overload] • Triggered by excessive motor current • Check the setting of the motor thermal protection, check the
motor load. Wait for the drive to cool down before restarting
OPF1 [1 motor phase
loss]
• Loss of one phase at drive output • Check the connections from the drive to the motor

221
Faults that can be reset with the automatic restart function, after the cause has disappeared
(continued)
OPF2 [3 motor phase loss] • Motor not connected or motor
power too low
• Output contactor open
• Instantaneous instability in the
motor current
• Check the connections from the drive to the motor
• If an output contactor is being used, parameterize [Output
Phase Loss] (OPL) = [Output cut] (OAC), page 176
• Test on a low power motor or without a motor: In factory
settings mode, motor phase loss detection is active [Output
Phase Loss] (OPL) = [Yes] (YES). To check the drive in
a test or maintenance environment, without having to use
a motor with the same rating as the drive (in particular for high
power drives), deactivate motor phase loss detection [Output
Phase Loss] (OPL) = [No] (nO)
• Check and optimize the [IR compensation] (UFr) page 67,
[Rated motor volt.] (UnS) and [Rated mot. current] (nCr)
parameters, page 60, and perform [Auto tuning] (tUn),
page 62.
OSF [Mains overvoltage] • Line voltage too high
• Disturbed line supply
• Check the line voltage
OtF1 [PTC1 overheat] • Overheating of the PTC1 probes
detected
• Check the motor load and motor size
• Check the motor ventilation
• Wait for the motor to cool before restarting
• Check the type and state of the PTC probes
OtF2 [PTC2 overheat] • Overheating of the PTC2 probes
detected
OtFL [LI6=PTC overheat] • Overheating of PTC probes
detected on input LI6
PtF1 [PTC1 probe] • PTC1 probes open or short-
circuited
• Check the PTC probes and the wiring between them and the
motor/drive
PtF2 [PTC2 probe] • PTC2 probes open or short-
circuited
PtFL [LI6=PTC probe] • PTC probes on input LI6 open or
short-circuited
SCF4 [IGBT short circuit] • Power component fault • Perform a test via the [1.10 DIAGNOSTICS] menu.
SCF5 [Motor short circuit] • Short-circuit at drive output • Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the
motor’s insulation
• Perform tests via the [1.10 DIAGNOSTICS] menu.
SLF1 [Modbus com.] • Interruption in communication on
the Modbus bus
• Check the communication bus
• Refer to the Modbus User's Manual
SLF2 [PowerSuite com.] • Fault communicating with
PowerSuite
• Check the PowerSuite connecting cable
SLF3 [HMI com.] • Fault communicating with the
graphic display terminal
• Check the terminal connection
SPIF [PI Feedback] • PID feedback below lower limit • Check the PID function feedback.
• Check the PID feedback supervision threshold and time delay,
page 145.
SSF [Torque/current lim] • Switch to torque limitation • Check if there are any mechanical problems
• Check the parameters of [TORQUE LIMITATION]
(tLA-) page 153 and the parameters of the
[TORQUE OR I LIM. DETECT.] (tId-) fault, page 185).
tJF [IGBT overheat] • Drive overheated • Check the size of the load/motor/drive
• Reduce the switching frequency
• Wait for the motor to cool before restarting
ULF [Proc. Underload Flt] • Process underload • Check and remove the cause of the underload.
• Check the parameters of the [PROCESS OVERLOAD] (ULd-)
function, page 189.

222
Faults that can be reset as soon as their causes disappear
The USF fault can be inhibited and cleared remotely by means of a logic input or control bit ([Fault inhibit assign.] (InH) parameter,
page 183).
Option card changed or removed
When an option card is removed or replaced by another, the drive locks in [Incorrect config.] (CFF) fault mode on power-up. If the card has
been deliberately changed or removed, the fault can be cleared by pressing the ENT key twice, which causes the factory settings to be
restored (see page 201) for the parameter groups affected by the card. These are as follows:
Card replaced by a card of the same type
• I/O cards: [Drive menu] (drM)
• Encoder cards: [Drive menu] (drM)
• Communication cards: Only the parameters that are specific to communication cards
• Controller Inside cards: [Prog. card menu] (PLC)
Card removed (or replaced by a different type of card)
• I/O card: [Drive menu] (drM)
• Encoder card: [Drive menu] (drM)
• Communication card: [Drive menu] (drM) and parameters specific to communication cards
• Controller Inside card: [Drive menu] (drM) and [Prog. card menu] (PLC)
Control card changed
When a control card is replaced by a control card configured on a drive with a different rating, the drive locks in [Power Ident] (PrtF) fault
mode on power-up. If the card has been deliberately changed, the fault can be cleared by modifying the [Power Identification] (Prt)
parameter, page 68, which causes all the factory settings to be restored.
CFF [Incorrect config.] • changed or removed
• The current configuration is
inconsistent
• Check that there are no card errors.
• In the event of the option card being changed/removed
deliberately, see the remarks below
• Return to factory settings or retrieve the backup
configuration, if it is valid (see page 201)
CFI [Invalid config.] • Invalid configuration
The configuration loaded in the drive
via the bus or communication network
is inconsistent.
• Check the configuration loaded previously
• Load a compatible configuration
HCF [Cards pairing] • The [CARDS PAIRING] (PPI-)
function, page 187, has been
configured and a drive card has
been changed
• In the event of a card error, reinsert the original card
• Confirm the configuration by entering the [Pairing password]
(PPI) if the card was changed deliberately
PHF [Input phase loss] • Drive incorrectly supplied or a fuse
blown
• Failure of one phase
• 3-phase ATV61 used on a single-
phase line supply
• Unbalanced load
This protection only operates with the
drive on load
• Check the power connection and the fuses.
• Use a 3-phase line.
• Disable the fault by [Input phase loss] (IPL) = [No] (nO).
(page 177)
PrtF [Power Ident] • The [Power Identification] (Prt)
parameter, page 68, is incorrect.
• Control card replaced by a control
card configured on a drive with
a different rating
• Enter the correct parameter (reserved for Schneider Electric
product support).
• Check that there are no card errors.
• In the event of the control card being changed deliberately,
see the remarks below
USF [Undervoltage] • Line supply too low
• Transient voltage dip
• Damaged pre-charge resistor
• Check the voltage and the parameters of
[UNDERVOLTAGE MGT] (USb-), page 180
• Replace the pre-charge resistor

223
User settings tables
[1.1 SIMPLY START] (SIM-) menu
Functions assigned to I/O
Code Name Factory setting Customer setting
tCC [2/3 wire control] [2 wire] (2C)
CFG [Macro configuration] [Start/Stop] (StS)
bFr [Standard mot. freq] [50 Hz] (50)
IPL [Input phase loss] According to drive
rating
nPr [Rated motor power] According to drive
rating
UnS [Rated motor volt.] According to drive
rating
nCr [Rated mot. current] According to drive
rating
FrS [Rated motor freq.] 50 Hz
nSP [Rated motor speed] According to drive
rating
tFr [Max frequency] 60 Hz
PHr [Output Ph rotation] ABC
ItH [Mot. therm. current] According to drive
rating
ACC [Acceleration] 3.0 s
dEC [Deceleration] 3.0 s
LSP [Low speed] 0
HSP [High speed] 50 Hz
Inputs
Outputs
Functions assigned Inputs
Outputs
Functions assigned
LI1 LO1
LI2 LO2
LI3 LO3
LI4 LO4
LI5 AI1
LI6 AI2
LI7 AI3
LI8 AI4
LI9 R1
LI10 R2
LI11 R3
LI12 R4
LI13 RP
LI14 Encoder

224
User settings tables
Other parameters (table to be created by the user)
Code Name Customer setting Code Name Customer setting

225
Index of functions
+/- speed 131
+/- speed around a reference 133
[2 wire] (2C) 31
[2nd CURRENT LIMIT.] 154
[3 wire] (3C) 31
[AUTO DC INJECTION] 125
[Auto tuning] 33
[AUTO TUNING BY LI] 164
[AUTOMATIC RESTART] 173
[CATCH ON THE FLY] 174
Command and reference channels 100
Deferred stop on thermal alarm 178
Direct power supply via DC bus 169
[DRIVE OVERHEAT] 177
[ENCODER CONFIGURATION] 87
[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-) 199
[FAULT RESET] 172
Flow limitation 167
[FLUXING BY LI] 136
[JOG] 127
Line contactor command 155
[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) 69
Motor or configuration switching [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.] 162
Motor thermal protection 175
[Noise reduction] 71
Output contactor command 157
Parameter set switching [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] 159
[4. PASSWORD] (COd-) 206
PID feedback supervision 144
PID regulator 137
Preset speeds 128
Process overload fault 190
Process underload fault 188
PTC probes 171
[RAMP] 120
Reference saving: 135
[REFERENCE SWITCH.] 118
[RP CONFIGURATION] 85
Skip frequencies 57
Sleep/Wake-up 147
Sleeping on the basis of flow detection 149
[STOP CONFIGURATION] 123
Summing input/Subtracting input/Multiplier 117
Torque limitation 152
Zero fluid or zero flow detection via sensor 165

226
Index of parameter codes
Code Page
[1.1SIMPLYSTART]
(SIM-)
[1.2MONITORING]
(SUP-)
[1.3SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[1.4MOTORCONTROL]
(drC-)
[1.5INPUTS/OUTPUTSCFG]
(I-O-)
[1.6COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[1.7APPLICATIONFUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[1.8FAULTMANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[1.9COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[1.12FACTORYSETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[4PASSWORD]
(COd-)
A1C- 98
A2C- 98
A3C- 98
AC2 45 122 134
143
ACC 34 45 120
AdC 125
AdCO 194
Add 194
AI1A 42 81
AI1E 81
AI1F 81
AI1S 81
AI1t 81
AI2A 42 82
AI2E 82
AI2F 82
AI2L 82
AI2S 82
AI2t 82
AI3A 42 83
AI3E 83
AI3F 83
AI3L 83
AI3S 83
AI3t 83
AI4A 42 84
AI4E 84
AI4F 84
AI4L 84
AI4S 84
AI4t 84
AICI 141
ALGr 43
AMOA 194
AMOC 194

227
AO1 96
AO1F 96
AO1t 96
AO2 97
AO2F 97
AO2t 97
AO3 97
AO3F 97
AO3t 97
AOH1 96
AOH2 97
AOH3 97
AOL1 96
AOL2 97
AOL3 97
Atr 173
AUt 62
bbA 74
bdCO 194
bFr 32 60
brA 122
brO 186
brP 186
brU 186
bSP 79
CCFG 31
CCS 109
Cd1 109
Cd2 109
CFG 31
CFPS 43
CHA1 160
CHA2 160
CHCF 108
CHI 168
CHM 164
Code Page
[1.1SIMPLYSTART]
(SIM-)
[1.2MONITORING]
(SUP-)
[1.3SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[1.4MOTORCONTROL]
(drC-)
(I-O-)
[1.6COMMAND]
(CtL-)
(FUn-)
(FLt-)
[1.9COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
(FCS-)
[4PASSWORD]
(COd-)

228
CHt 58 168
CL2 51 154
CLI 51 71 154
CLL 184
CLO- 43
CnF1 164
CnF2 164
CnFS 43
COd 207
COd2 207
COL 184
COP 110
CrH2 82
CrH3 83
CrH4 84
CrL2 82
CrL3 83
CrL4 84
CSt 207
Ctd 56
CtdL 56
Ctt 63
dA2 119
dA3 119
dAS 158
dbS 158
dCF 49 123 191
dCI 124
dCO 169
dE2 45 122, 134
dEC 34 45 120
dFL 58 168
dLr 207
dSI 134
dSP 132
EFI 88
Code Page
[1.1SIMPLYSTART]
(SIM-)
[1.2MONITORING]
(SUP-)
[1.3SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[1.4MOTORCONTROL]
(drC-)
(I-O-)
[1.6COMMAND]
(CtL-)
(FUn-)
(FLt-)
[1.9COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
(FCS-)
[4PASSWORD]
(COd-)

229
EFr 88
EIL 88
EnC 70 87
EnS 69 87
EnU 70 88
EPL 179
ErCO 194
EtF 179
F1 64
F2 64
F2d 56
F2dL 56
F3 64
F4 65
F5 65
FCP 65
FCSI 201
FFd 58 151
FLI 136
FLO 195
FLOC 195
FLOt 195
FLr 174
FLU 52 136
FPI 143
Fr1 108
Fr1b 118
Fr2 109
FrH 43
FrS 32 60
FrSS 66
Frt 122
FrY- 201
FSt 123
Ftd 56
FtdL 56
Code Page
[1.1SIMPLYSTART]
(SIM-)
[1.2MONITORING]
(SUP-)
[1.3SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[1.4MOTORCONTROL]
(drC-)
(I-O-)
[1.6COMMAND]
(CtL-)
(FUn-)
(FLt-)
[1.9COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
(FCS-)
[4PASSWORD]
(COd-)

230
FtO 58 190
FtU 57 189
GFS 201
HSP 34 46
IdA 68
IdC 49 124 191
IdC2 49 124 191
IdM 68
InH 183
InHr 183
InHS 183
Inr 45 120
IPHr 43
IPL 32 177
IPr 43
ItH 34 46
JF2 57
JF3 57
JFH 57
JGF 52 127
JGt 52 127
JOG 127
JPF 57
L1A to L14A 42 77
L1d to L14d 77
LC2 154
LCr 43
LCt 156
LdS 66
LES 156
LFA 68
LFd 58 151
LFF 145 191
LFL2
LFL3
LFL4
182
LFM 68
Code Page
[1.1SIMPLYSTART]
(SIM-)
[1.2MONITORING]
(SUP-)
[1.3SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[1.4MOTORCONTROL]
(drC-)
(I-O-)
[1.6COMMAND]
(CtL-)
(FUn-)
(FLt-)
[1.9COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
(FCS-)
[4PASSWORD]
(COd-)

231
LIS1 42
LIS2 42
LLC 156
LO1 93
LO1d 93
LO1H 93
LO1S 93
LO2 93
LO2d 93
LO2H 93
LO2S 93
LO3 94
LO3d 94
LO3H 94
LO3S 94
LO4 94
LO4d 94
LO4H 94
LO4S 94
LOC 58 190
LPI 55 145
LqS 66
LSP 34 46 148
LUL 57 189
LUn 57 189
MA2 119
MA3 119
MFr 43
MPI 145
nCA1 193
nCA2 193
nCA3 193
nCA4 193
nCA5 193
nCA6 193
nCA7 193
Code Page
[1.1SIMPLYSTART]
(SIM-)
[1.2MONITORING]
(SUP-)
[1.3SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[1.4MOTORCONTROL]
(drC-)
(I-O-)
[1.6COMMAND]
(CtL-)
(FUn-)
(FLt-)
[1.9COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
(FCS-)
[4PASSWORD]
(COd-)

232
nCA8 193
nCr 32 60
nCrS 66
nFd 151
nFFt 58 166
nFS 166
nFSt 58 166
nMA1 193
nMA2 193
nMA3 193
nMA4 193
nMA5 193
nMA6 193
nMA7 193
nMA8 193
nPr 32 60
nrd 71
nSL 68
nSP 32 61
nSPS 66
nSt 123
o06 43
o02 43
o03 43
o04 43
o05 43
OCC 158
OdL 190
Odt 176
OFI 71
OHL 177
OLL 176
OPL 176
OPr 43
Otr 43
PAH 54 142
Code Page
[1.1SIMPLYSTART]
(SIM-)
[1.2MONITORING]
(SUP-)
[1.3SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[1.4MOTORCONTROL]
(drC-)
(I-O-)
[1.6COMMAND]
(CtL-)
(FUn-)
(FLt-)
[1.9COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
(FCS-)
[4PASSWORD]
(COd-)

233
PAL 54 142
PAU 143
PEr 55 142
PEt 43
PFI 85
PFL 64
PFr 85
PGA 88
PGI 69 88
PHS 66
PHr 33 62
PIA 85
PIC 142
PIF 141
PIF1 141
PIF2 141
PII 141
PIL 85
PIM 143
PIP1 141
PIP2 141
PIS 142
POH 54 142
POL 54 142
PPI 187
PPn 68
PPnS 66
Pr2 146
Pr4 146
PrP 54 142
Prt 68
PS1- 160
PS2- 161
PS3- 161
PS2 129
PS4 129
Code Page
[1.1SIMPLYSTART]
(SIM-)
[1.2MONITORING]
(SUP-)
[1.3SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[1.4MOTORCONTROL]
(drC-)
(I-O-)
[1.6COMMAND]
(CtL-)
(FUn-)
(FLt-)
[1.9COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
(FCS-)
[4PASSWORD]
(COd-)

234
PS8 129
PSr 55 143
PSt 108
PtC1 172
PtC2 172
PtCL 172
PtH 43
r1 89
r1d 91
r1H 91
r1S 91
r2 91
r2d 91
r2H 91
r2S 91
r3 92
r3d 92
r3H 92
r3S 92
r4 92
r4d 92
r4H 92
r4S 92
rCA 158
rCb 118
rCHt 58 168
rdG 54 142
rFC 109
rFr 43
rIG 54 142
rIn 108
rMUd 57 189
rP2 55 146
rP3 55 146
rP4 55 146
rPC 43
Code Page
[1.1SIMPLYSTART]
(SIM-)
[1.2MONITORING]
(SUP-)
[1.3SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[1.4MOTORCONTROL]
(drC-)
(I-O-)
[1.6COMMAND]
(CtL-)
(FUn-)
(FLt-)
[1.9COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
(FCS-)
[4PASSWORD]
(COd-)

235
rPE 43
rPF 43
rPG 54 141
rPI 141
rPO 43
rPS 122
rPt 120
rrS 76
rSA 68
rSAS 66
rSF 172
rSL 148
rSM 68
rSMS 66
rtd 56
rtdL 56
rtH 43
SA2 119
SA3 119
SAt 178
SCSI 201
SdC1 50 125
SdC2 50 125
SFC 46
SFr 51 71
SIt 46
SLE 52 148
SLL 184
SLP 49 67
SOP 72
SP2 53 130
SP3 53 130
SP4 53 130
SP5 53 130
SP6 53 130
SP7 53 130
Code Page
[1.1SIMPLYSTART]
(SIM-)
[1.2MONITORING]
(SUP-)
[1.3SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[1.4MOTORCONTROL]
(drC-)
(I-O-)
[1.6COMMAND]
(CtL-)
(FUn-)
(FLt-)
[1.9COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
(FCS-)
[4PASSWORD]
(COd-)

236
SP8 53 130
SPd 43
SPG 46
SPM 135
Srb 57 189, 190
SrP 54 134
SSb 185
StM 180
StO 185
StP 180
Str 132
Strt 181
Stt 123
SUL 72
tA1 45 121
tA2 45 121
tA3 45 121
tA4 46 121
tAA 153
tAC 43
tAr 173
tbr 194
tbr2 194
tbS 180
tCC 31 76
tCt 76
tdI 49 124 191
tdC 49 124 191
tdC1 50 125
tdC2 50 126
tFO 194
tFO2 194
tFr 32 61
tHA 177,
178
tHb 43
Code Page
[1.1SIMPLYSTART]
(SIM-)
[1.2MONITORING]
(SUP-)
[1.3SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[1.4MOTORCONTROL]
(drC-)
(I-O-)
[1.6COMMAND]
(CtL-)
(FUn-)
(FLt-)
[1.9COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
(FCS-)
[4PASSWORD]
(COd-)

237
tHd 43
tHr 43
tHt 176
tLA 153
tLC 153
tLIG 56 153
tLIM 56 153
tLS 52 148
tOL 190
tPI 55 145
trA 68
trM 68
tSM 180
ttd 56 176,
178
ttd2 176,
178
ttd3 176,
178
ttO 194
tUL 164
tUn 33 62
tUS 33 62
U0 64
U1 64
U2 64
U3 64
U4 65
U5 65
Ubr 74
UC2 65
UCb 174
UdL 189
UCP 65
UFr 49 67
UIH1 81
UIH2 82
Code Page
[1.1SIMPLYSTART]
(SIM-)
[1.2MONITORING]
(SUP-)
[1.3SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[1.4MOTORCONTROL]
(drC-)
(I-O-)
[1.6COMMAND]
(CtL-)
(FUn-)
(FLt-)
[1.9COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
(FCS-)
[4PASSWORD]
(COd-)

238
UIH4 84
UIL1 81
UIL2 82
UIL4 84
ULn 43
ULr 207
ULt 189
UnS 32 60
UOH1 96
UOH2 97
UOH3 97
UOL1 96
UOL2 97
UOL3 97
UOP 43
UPL 180
UPP 148
UrES 180
USb 180
USI 134
USL 180
USP 132
USt 180
Code Page
[1.1SIMPLYSTART]
(SIM-)
[1.2MONITORING]
(SUP-)
[1.3SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[1.4MOTORCONTROL]
(drC-)
(I-O-)
[1.6COMMAND]
(CtL-)
(FUn-)
(FLt-)
[1.9COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
(FCS-)
[4PASSWORD]
(COd-)

2005-09
atv61_programming_manual_en_v2

Atv61 programming manual_en_v2

More Related Content

Viewers also liked (15)

Similar to Atv61 programming manual_en_v2 (20)

More from Toàn Huỳnh (20)

Recently uploaded (20)

Atv61 programming manual_en_v2